Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 1

MLR Institute of Technology (Affiliated to JNTU & Approved by AICTE)

Dundigal, Quthbullapur Mandal, R.R. Dist.- 500 043.

Ph: 08418 – 204066, 204088, 9866755166

1.GENERAL INFORMATION

About the College

1.1 BEAUTIFUL CAMPUS:

Set in Sylvan surroundings away from the hustle & bustle of city life yet only 4

km away from Mahindra Satyam Technology Park on Balanagar – Narsapur state

highway, the Institute is extremely conducive to academic, co-curricular and

extra-curricular activities. It has large and well ventilated buildings with modern

equipment in place and “State of the art”, sports facilities.

HIGHLIGHTS:

1.2 FACULTY:

The College is proud to have the best faculty, a blend of experienced and

academics with eminent academicians team IIT’s, NIT’s and other reputed

organizations teaching at the Institute that makes MLRIT as one of the best

Institute pursue B.Tech, M.Tech,MCA and MBA as one of the under JNTU

Hyderabad. The faculty is constantly encouraged to upgrade their qualifications

and a number of them have enrolled for Ph.D. Most of the faculty members have

been empowered with High Impact teaching under Wipro Mission 10X program.

1.3 INFRASTRUCTURES:

The Institute is housed in a RCC Building with a built up area of 2.50 Lakh Sq. Ft

in 10 Acres and established an Air Conditioned Auditorium with Seminar Halls

and a Central Library. A good canteen caters hygienic food and a fleet of buses

running from all important points to bring the students to the college.

Accessibility of HDFC Bank ATM within the Campus is an recent addition to

enable students and faculty to withdraw cash anytime.

1.4 LABORATORIES:

The Institute has State of the art laboratories with 500 plus Pentium IV Branded

Systems equipped with latest hardware and software with online testing facility

catering to the needs of CSE, IT. The Institute also has well equipped Electronic

Labs, Aeronautical Engineering Labs and Workshops for ECE and Aeronautical

Engineering Students. The college has recently established Microsoft, IBM for

CSE/IT cadence lab for VLSI design and CATIA Aeronautical Design Lab.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 2

1.5 TOEFL CENTRE:

The Institute is an Authorized TOEFL iBT Centre, which will conduct tests all

through the year as per the IBT schedule.

1.6 ENGLISH LANGUAGE LABORATORY:

The Institute has established Ultramodern Computerized English language

Laboratory with 60 plus Computer Systems loaded with latest Software to

enhance the Softskills of Students to make the Students Industry ready.

1.7 R&D Cell:

The Institute has an R&D Cell under the Chairmanship of ?. The R&D cell

undertakes externally funded R&D projects from agencies like AICTE, DST,

UGC and other similar state, private and society / trust bodies. It also undertakes

research publications and interactions of faculty members with outside world.

1.8 LIBRARY:

The Institute Library has over 14598 books and 78 National and International

journals that are required to all branches of Engineering. The Institute has the

unique distinction of becoming Member of DELNET that connects more than 700

libraries in Asia Pacific Region. The Library has 35 Computers with 10 MB PS,

Internet Facility that makes our knowledge Savvy Students to be technically

competent on par with Industry professionals.

1.9 NATIONAL PROGRAMME ON TECHNOLOGY ENHANCED

LEARNING

(NPTEL)

The main objective of NPTEL program is to enhance the quality of engineering

education in the country by developing curriculum based video and web courses.

This is being carried out by seven IITs and IISc Bangalore as a collaborative

project. In the first phase of the project, supplementary content for 129 web

courses in engineering / science and humanities have been developed. Each c

ourse contains materials that can be covered in depth in 60 or more lecture hours.

In addition, 110 courses have been developed in video format, with each course

comprising of approximately 60 or more one-hour lectures. In the next phase

other premier institutions are also likely to participate in content creation.

1.10 CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institution organizes Local Industrial Visits to Organizations like

DOORDARSHAN, BSNL, and to Student Conferences like HYSEA,Student

Conference at INFOSYS, Gachibowli Campus, and Government Sponsored

Summits like INDO SOFT IT Summit at Hitex City Convention Centre to

Interface with the Industry for Career Planning and to make them Industry

Ready. The Institute focuses on Techno Management Events like Technonium

and Zavtra to enhance the Technical Skills and Soft Skills to make them

Employable.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 3

1.11 PROFESSIONAL BODIES:

MLR Institute of Technology has the unique distinction of becoming

Institutional Member in Professional bodies such as Confederation of Indian

Industry (CII), Aeronautical Society of India (AeSI), Computer Society of India

(CSI), Institute of Electronics and Telecommunication Engineering (IETE),

Indian Society of Technical Education (ISTE), ELIAP and Hyderabad

Management Association.(HMA)

1.12 EXTRA-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES:

The Institute helps the B.Tech, M.Tech and MBA Students to imbibe Culture,

Knowledge and Sportsman Spirit during their Study Period.

The Institution has a Basketball Court ,Volley ball Court, Beach Volley ball

Court, Cricket Stadium with 400 meter Excellent track for Athletic Meet and

Indoor Stadium for Shuttle Badminton and Gymnasium. MLRIT has been

regularly conducting JNTU Zonal Games Football, Cricket, and State level

Volleyball Tournaments. The Institute has been awarded as the best organiser

for conducting JNTU Zone A Intercollegiate Tournaments by JNTUH. MLRIT

is affiliated to Hyderabad Cricket Association (HCA) to play league Cricket

Matches. The college has conducted 5K RUN in 2008-09 and south zone

Cricket Tournament in 2009-10.The college has been conducting JNTU-H

Cricket Tournament in 2009-10.

The Institute also organises events like Traditional Day, Annual Day, Fashion

Shows, Rockshows and other Cultural Events. MLR Institutions has been

conducting Traditional Day every year. The purpose of Celebrating traditional

day is basically to imbibe a spirit of Oneness, where the First year Students who

have joined the Institute shed their Inhibitions, play and dine together with their

seniors and recollect the old traditions & glory of the Past.

Apart from that the traditional day is being celebrated with a purpose of

removing fear and as a measure of Anti-Ragging activity.

The college has a National Service Scheme (NSS) unit, which conducts a

number of programmes viz blood donation camp, tree plantation, community

services in the adjoining villages, flood relief, etc. The college has sent a team of

volunteers for flood relief service on 14th October 2009 to Mahaboob Nagar.

1.13 STUDENTS COUNSELING & CAREER SERVICES DEPT

(SCCS – DEPT):

MLRIT is only institution among 600 + professional colleges in AP, that takes

into consideration each student individual aspiration and ambition into audit,

and extend support on exclusive basis to each student for successful future into

Employment/ Entrepreneur/ Research & Development / Higher Education

before graduating from our campus.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 4

1.14 FINISHING SCHOOL:

MLR Institute of Technology is the only Institute which offers Speical Training

Programme partnering Institute for Electronic Goverance, Govt of A.P. and

Infosys. The students from the Institute are selected every year and given special

Training programme to make them Industry Grade and opportunity is given to

them to place themselves in Multi National Companies.

1.15 IN HOUSE PROJECTS:

The students are taking part in International Project competitions hosted by

major MNCs, like IBM, Microsoft and Infosys. The Great Mind Challenge

hosted by IBM, Microsoft Imagine Cup and project work as part of foundation

programme conducted under the aegis of Infosys are some of the important

projects presently being undertaken by the students of MLRIT. Further, the

students are encouraged to do In House Projects under the supervision of expect

faculty members.In addition,students are encouraged to give innovative ideas

and do projects under the aegis of Microsoft academic innovative alliance.

1.16 MOUs:

The Institute has MOUs for student and faculty enhancement programmes with

Multi National Companies like

➢ IBM

IBM has extablished “Center of Excellence” in MLRIT

➢ Sun Microsystem Systems

Student Development Programmes and Certificates

➢ Oracle

Faculty and Student Development Programmes

➢ WIPRO: Mission – 10X Programme

Faculty impact teaching programme

➢ CA Labs

Student and Faculty enablement Programme

➢ Infotech

To enhance the quality of educational experience for student community

➢ Mahindra Satyam

Industry Oriented course ware and Technology

➢ Institute of Electronic Governance

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 5

Faculty Enablement Programme on “Soft Skills, Technical Skills, Reasoning

and Aptitude and

Basic Computer Skills”.

➢ Indo – US Collaboration for Engineering Education

Faculty Development Programme sponsored by Infosys

➢ Microsoft IT Academy

• Student and Faculty enablement programme.

• Microsoft-Academic Innovative Alliance.

➢ Infosys

Foundation Programme for students

➢ IIIT, Gachibowli, Hyderabad

Certification in Information Technology (CIT) for students

➢ SAM Technologies In house projects in Robotics and Embedded System

1.17 Student Achievements:

➢ Ms. R. PALANIAMMAL of Aeronautical Engineering department has

secured a University Rank and Gold Medal for the batch 2005-2009

➢ A PRAVEEN KUMAR secured 105th rank in GATE.

➢ Rishit D Shah became the Microsoft Student Partner and Microsoft Student

Campus Ambassador. He is a Microsoft Certified Professional.

➢ N. Sai Praneeth & EaswarReddy also has been selected as a Microsoft

student ambassador.

➢ M.Prashanth Reddy and M. Ramya of CSE Department have been selected

as the Student Ambassador for IBM.

➢ The CSE department students Nikhil Bharadwaj, Shashank and Sulibhavi

Santhosh developed a Google Application connecting all the institute

activities. Lolitha and Gangasudha of IT, Praneeth, Rajender, Akshay Raj,

Harish and Pankaj of CSE, Achuth and Gautam of Aero are maintaining the

application.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 6

➢ M. Pavan Kumar of CSE Department has been selected as brand

Ambassadir if Sun Academic Initiative.

➢ 253 students and 5 faculty members have got IBM DB2 Certification as part

of TGMC’09

➢ The Institute has achieved 100% results in Aeronautical Engineering, 99%

in CSE, 94% in ECE, 91% in MCA and 83% in MBA Department for

outgoing batches.

➢ The students of MLRIT have won Volleyball Tournament and were

Runner’s in Table Tennis Singles and Dobules JNTU Zone ‘A’ Inter

Collegiate Tournament.

➢ G. Manikanta Gupta, ECE 1st year won “National memory championship”

in abstract imagaes, organized by Worl Memroy Council.

1.18 Contact Information

Principal Prof. Dr. P. Bhaskara Reddy 9866678599

Dean (CS) Prof. K. L. Chugh 9866666601

Department Head CSE Mr.G.Kiran Kumar 9959535832

Department Head ECE Mr. S.V.S Prasad 9160404638

Department Head IT Dr. KVSN Rama Rao 9848292046

Department Head AERO Dr.M.S.N.Guptha 9160404640

Department Head MECH DDr.S.Madhu 9160404635

Department Head MBA Ms. K. Sruhullekha 9160404639

Department Head H&S Mr. Prabhakar 9848472797

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 7

2. PLACEMENT & HIGHER STUDIES

MLR Institute of Technology has a unique distinction of placing their First Batch of

B.Tech Students in their prefinal year of Study and MBA Students in Multi National

Companies. The Institute has so far interacted with more than 69 Companies and 233

Selections from B.Tech/MCA and MBA Programmes have taken Place.

In this direction Apart from the Placements the Institute has arranged Summer

Internship Programmes with Companies like Computer Amociates, Mind Tree M/s

Infotech Enterprises Ltd, Mahindra Finance, Max New York Life Insurance, Nokia Ltd

, Mahindra Finance, Bajaj Capital Ltd, Reliance Money and Tata AIG for Engineering

and MBA Students to develop Mentor Relationships and to get to know about the Work

Culture and gain Competencies to make them Industry Ready during their Study period.

The Institute has arranged Campus Recruitment drives with MNC’s like TATA

Advanced systems, IBM, Medha Sevo drives, NR Radio & Switches Pvt. Ltd., Osi

Technologies ltd., Genpact, Reliance Money, Nagarjuna Cements Ltd & Oasis

Software Informatics.

The Institute ortganized an Industrial Tour to 3rd & 4th Year Aeronautical Engineering

students to Satish Dawan Space Center (SHAR) Sriharikota on 16-12-2009. The 4th

Year students visited Airforce Academy, Dundigal, for an Industrial Visit on 22-12-

2009.

The CSE & ECE students visited Infosys Infosys on 18-07-2009 for the SPARK

Programme which is an orientation programme on Information Technology Space.

2.1 INDUSTRY GRADE SKILLS REQUIRED FOR EMPLOYMENT

Behavioral and Communication Skills are recognized as important elements in

professional development of an Engineer including English for specific purposes.

Employers give considerable value to these diverse set of skills at the time of

interviews.

In addition to course curriculum, every student will gain the following skills

during the study period:

➢ Analytical and Problem solving skills

➢ Subject – specific knowledge

➢ Research and improved decision making abilities

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 8

➢ Oral communication skills

➢ Managerial skills

➢ Understanding of other cultures

➢ Confidence and competence to work in International environment

As students are the future leaders, the Responsibility, Accountability and exhibiting

the leadership skills should start from the first year of engineering. Every student is

advised to read / practice from the following books;

➢ Verbal and Nonverbal by RS Agarwal

➢ Baron GRE

➢ Wren and Martin English Grammer Book

2.2 IMPORTANT CRITERIA OF EMPLOYMENT

In addition to the industry grade skills required for employment, the most

important criteria for employment is that the student should get a minimum of

60% in academics with no backlogs to make them eligible for campus

recruitments. In the recent past, many companies stipulated a cut of 68% for

attending the interview / writing the test. Every student should Endeavour to

achieve a minimum of 68% with no backlogs to make them suitable for picking

up by good companies.

Job Portals:

1. www.freshersworld.com

2. www.monster.com

3. www.naukri.com

2.3 HIGHER STUDIES

M.Tech

The Graduate Aptitude Test in Engineering (GATE) is an all-India examination

administered and conducted in eight zones across the country by the GATE

Committee comprising faculty from Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore and

seven Indian Institutes of Technology on behalf of the National Coordinating Board

- GATE, Department of Education, Ministry of Human Resources Development

(MHRD), and Government of India.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 9

Objective

To identify meritorious and motivated candidates for admission to Post Graduate

programmes in Engineering, Technology, Architecture and Pharmacy at the National

level. To serve as benchmark for normalization of the Undergraduate Engineering

Education in the country. This provides an opportunity for advanced engineering

education in India. An M.E or M.Tech degree is a desirable qualification for our

young engineers seeking a rewarding professional career. Engineering students,

while in the final year of their degree course, spend considerable time in seeking an

opening for studies in foreign universities. The students are advised to pursue

M.Tech in IIT’s/NIT’s/University Colleges.

MBA

Earning a Master’s of Business Administration (MBA) degree can provide you with

management skills and business expertise that open new career opportunities to you.

An MBA program will also launch you into the much higher pay range that upper

level managers and executives enjoy. Furthermore, in the high-level positions, an

MBA degree will allow you to hold and your work will often be more interesting and

rewarding. The students are advised to pursue M.BA in IIM’s/XLRI/Reputed

Business Schools.

HIGHER STUDIES ABROAD

TOEFL is mandatory for seeking admission in any academic course at any level-

undergraduate, graduate or post graduate, in USA and Canada. Similarly UK

Universities ask for IELTS for seeking admission to graduate and past graduate

courses.

GRE The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is administered by the Educational

Testing Services (ETS) for admission into all graduate academic programs (except

management) in universities across USA and Canada and some selected universities

across the world including India. The exam is a Computer Adaptive Test and is

administered at any of the Sylvan testing centers in the country after prior

registration.

The GMAT is a Computer Adaptive Test administered online by Educational Testing

Services (ETS) through Sylvan testing centers located in all the major cities in India.

Those who wish to enroll for courses in Business Management in American

universities have to take the GMAT test and submit their scores to the department.

2.4 VARIOUS SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

Bharat Petroleum Scholarship For Higher Studies | Balarama Digest Scholarship |

Central Institute of Indian Languages | Fair & Lovely Foundation - Project Saraswati

Scholarships | Government Of India Office of the Director General of Civil Aviation

Scholarship | Homi Bhabha Centre For Science Education Tata Institute of

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 10

Fundamental Research Research Scholarships | HSBC Scholarships | Indian Council

Of Agricultural Research Award Of National Talent Scholarship In Agriculture |

Indian Institute Of Geomagnetism Research Scholars | Invention Awards For School

Children | Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL) - Scholarships | Jawaharlal Nehru

Memorial Fund Jawaharlal Nehru Scholarships For Doctoral Studies | Junior

Research Scholarships For Cancer Biology Tata Memorial Centre & Tata Memorial

Hospital | Jaigopal Garodia Vivekananda Trust Scholarships | Lalit Kala Akademi -

Scholarship | Mahindra All India Talent Scholarships For Diploma courses In

Polytechnics | National Brain Research Centre Scholarships | NTPC Scholarships |

National Institute Of Science Communication And Information

Resources(NISCAIR) | National Olympiad Programme | National Level Science

Talent Search Examination - 2005 | Narotam Sekhsaria Scholarship Programme |

National Brain Research Centre Scholarships, Post Doctoral Fellowships | National

Aptitude Test | NIIT National IT Aptitude Test | Oil And Natural Gas Corporation

Ltd (ONGC) Scholarships To SC/ST Students | Office Of The Director General of

Civil Aviation Scholarships Stipend to the SC/ST Candidates | Rashtriya Sanskrit

Sansthan - Scholarships | Scholarships To Young Artistes | Saf-Madanjeet Singh

Scholarship | Sports Authority Of India - Sports Scholarships | SAF-Madanjeet Singh

Scholarship | Spic Macay Scholarships | The Childrens Foundation - Scholarships |

The L&T Build-India Scholarship | The Hindu-Hitachi Scholarships | The Paul

Foundation Scholarships | Technology Information Forecsting and Assessment

Council(TIFAC) Women Scientist Scholarship Scheme | The Young Talent IT

Scholarship The Dr.GB Scholarships Foundation |

2.5 VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL SCHOLARSHIPS AVAILABLE IN INDIA

A * STAR India Youth Scholarship | A.M.M. Arunachalam-Lakshmi Achi

Scholarship For Overseas Study | British Chevening Scholarships | Bharat Petroleum -

Scholarships for Higher Studies | Cambridge Nehru Scholarships | Commonwealth

Scholarship and Fellowship | Czech Government Scholarship | Chevening Technology

Enterprise Scholarship Programme | Chinese Government Scholarship | Greek

Government Scholarships | Israel Government Scholarship | Iranian Government

Scholarship | Offer of Italian Government Scholarship | Japanese Government

Scholarships | K.C.Mahindra Scholarships For Post-Graduate Studies Abroad | Lady

Meherbai D.Tata Scholarships | Mexican Government Scholarship | Norwegian

Government Scholarships | National Overseas Scholarships/Passage Grant for ST

Candidates | Portuguese Government Scholarships | Sophia Merit Scholarships Inc |

Slovak Government Scholarship | SIA Youth Scholarships | The Rhodes Scholarships

India | The Ramakrishna Mission Institute Of Culture Award of Debesh-Kamal

Scholarships For Studies Abroad | The Inlaks Foundation - Scholarships |

Website for Higher Studies:

1. www.higherstudyabroad.org

2. www.highereducationinindia.com

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 11

3. STUDENT CAREER ORIENTED PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION

COURSES

As per the career plan for students of MLR Institute of Technology with a view to bridge

the gap between Industry and Academia, it has been planned to equip every student with

at least three International / National certification by the time he / she completes the

course of study. The details of the certification courses are given below:

Branch

Year Name of the Certification Course

Computer Science and

Engineering / IT / MCA

2nd Year Certificate Information Technology

3rd Year IBM Certified DB2 Database

Associate, Infosys Campus Connect

4th Year IBM Certified Rational Application

Developer

4th Year SUN Certified Java Programmer

Electronics and Communication

Engineering

2nd Year Institute of Electronics and

Telecommunication Engineering

3rd Year Motorola @ CAMPUS

4th Year IBM Certified DB2 Database

Associate

Aeronautical Engineering

2nd Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th Year Certificate in CATIA

Mechanical Engineering

2nd Year Certificate in AutoCAD

3rd Year Certificate in HighPerMesh

4th Year Certificate in CATIA

3.1 Help Desk

The college has set up a Help Desk for Career Guidance and overseas education. The

aim of the Help Desk is to provide a flatform for the students to choose the Right

Destination. The students can reach the Help Desk in person or through mail at email id

helpdesk@mlrinstitutions.ac.in

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 12

4. PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND GUIDANCE

4.1 STUDENT FEEDBACK

In case the students find it difficult to cope up / understand a particular subject,

they are

advised to discuss it with

a. The Concerned Teacher

b. The Class Teacher

c. The Department Head

d. The Principal

Students can use the suggestion boxes for communicating feedback. Students

should mention their names so that they can be informed of the progress / more

details / clarifications can be obtained.

4.2 CLASS TEACHER

Every class is assigned a Class Teacher (a faculty member). Students can directly

discuss their college related or personal problems related to studies with them. The

Class Teachers are accessible to the students and they can talk to the Class Teacher

or whenever they are free from class / lab work. Class Teacher will meet with the

class representative on daily basis to discuss their day-to-day difficulties if any.

4.3 CLASS REPRESENTATIVES AND THEIR ROLES

Two students from each class are selected as the Class Representatives from the

department basing on their academic performance and discipline. Department Head

makes the selections.

Responsibilities of the Class Representatives:

➢ Collection of MIS format from Class Teacher daily.

➢ Communicating the departmental / college directives & information to the

students.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 13

➢ Collecting the feedback of difficulties faced by the students and

communicating Suggestions for improvements.

➢ Coordinating academic events and co-curricular activities.

➢ Encourage students to interact for better studies, sharing books and notes.

➢ Compilation and submission of MIS form to class teacher at the end of

the period.

4.4 PERFORMANCE COUNSELING

Mentors will evaluate the student individually for the following:

a. Less marks in internal exams

b. Continuous absence (3 days) and shortage of attendance

c. Not understanding the subject

d. Students from Telugu medium

e. Assistance for back log subjects etc.

f. Communication with parents

g. Provide help to back log students

4.5 REMEDIAL CLASSES / TUTORIAL / REVISIONS

Remedial Classes are conducted for students who are weak and who do not perform

well in their internal examinations / class tests or for the students who want extra

help. Slots in the time table have been reserved for Tutorial where in the students are

helped to solve the question in the class itself.

4.6 BACKLOG MANAGEMENT

The Mentors maintain a complete record of Examination results of each student and

they counsel and guide them in preparing for backlogs. Students are provided with

material and important questions are discussed.

4.7 CORRESPONDENCE WITH PARENTS

Parents will be informed about the performance of their ward from time to time in

the semester. However parents are requested to be in touch with the Student mentor /

Department Head on a regular basis.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 14

5. RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR STUDENTS

5.1 ADMINISTRATIVE

1. Students, admitted into this College, are deemed to have agreed to the rules and

regulations of the college, as laid down by the College Authorities from time to

time, and the rules lay down in this leaflet, issued at the time of admission.

2. Students should inform any changes in the addresses/Phone No. of their

parents / guardians to the college office.

3. The college shall communicate to the parents \ guardians of the students from

time to time regarding the regularity and performance in the examinations of

their wards. The case of serious indiscipline on the part of the students (s) may

also be communicated to parent (s) \ guardian (s).

5.2. ACADEMIC

1. Students should attend the classes in - time. Late- comers shall not be

permitted to enter the class room and they are likely to loose the attendance.

2. Students are expected to be regular to the classes. The students Shall not absent

themselves for classes without prior approval. Prior permission shall be taken

from concerned counselor and submitted to the Head of the Department.

3. In case of ill-health, the student should submit the medical certificate along

with prescription, etc., from a registered medical doctor. The student should

get the medical certificate within two days from the date of reporting to the

college after iII health and also produce a letter from Father/ Mother

regarding ill-health. Permission on medical grounds shall not be granted for one

or two days.

4. The students should come to the laboratories with the prescribed uniform.

5. If a student disturbs the class or makes mischief, he / she will be marked

absent and may be expelled from the class.

6. Students shall spend their leisure time in the library/computer center.

7. Students are expected to put up the minimum aggregate percentage of

attendance (75%) as laid down by the JNT University. Students, falling short

of 75% of attendance shall not be promoted to the next Semester \ Class.

8. Parents \ guardians of the students can contact the college authorities either in

person or by post regarding discipline, regularity in attending classes,

performance in the examinations, etc., of their wards.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 15

5.3 DRESS CODE

1. Students are expected to attend the college properly dressed. They should

wear the prescribed uniform while attending laboratory classes.

2. Students are expected to carry the identity cards, issued by the college, in the

campus. They are required to show the identity cards at the library, computer

center, office, etc. Students without Identity Cards are not allowed in to the

laboratory classes.

5.4 DISCIPLINE & PUNCTUALITY

3. No student shall enter or leave the class room without the permission of the

teacher.

4. Calling students out of their class rooms while the lecture is in progress is

prohibited.

5. Students are required to help in keeping the rooms, buildings, and premises

clean and tidy. Writing or sticking up of posters and notices on the walls is

strictly prohibited.

6. Smoking, Consumption of alcohol, intoxicating drinks or drugs is strictly

prohibited in and around the college premises. Those indulging in such

activities will be put severely or expelled.

7. Students are expected to behave well with the staff, other students and the

general public. Any misbehavior, coming to the notice of the college

authorities, will be severely dealt with.

8. The conduct of the students should be exemplary not only within the premises

of the college but also outside. This will help in maintaining the image and

status of the college.

9. Students are required to observe silence at all times in the college campus.

They shall not talk in loud tone or call each other by shouting.

10. Students are prohibited from loitering in the verandahs / campus during class

hours, and sitting on the steps, stair-cases or parapet walls.

11. Students are not permitted to resort to strikes and demonstrations within the

campus. Participation in such activity entails their dismissal from the college.

Any problem they face may be represented to the Counselor / Head of the

Department / Principal.

12. Students are prohibited carrying Cell Phones and organizing any meeting or

entertainment in the college campus without the permission of the college

authorities.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 16

13. The entry of outsiders without permission is prohibited. Any student found

responsible for bringing outsiders into the campus for settling personal disputes

with other students, shall be expelled from the college.

14. The college is entitled to take any disciplinary action, which is deemed

necessary in the case of any indiscipline on the part of the students. The same

will be reflected on the Conduct Certificate issued at the time of leaving the

college.

15. No Student Unions, except Professional Associations, are permitted in the

college.

16. If the students cause any damage to the college property knowingly or

unknowingly individually or in a group they have to pay 5 times to cost of

property damaged them. All the students are collectively responsible for the

proper maintenance college property i.e. building, furniture, lab equipment,

garden, playgrounds, etc., recovery, calculated on semester to semester basis,

will be collected along with examination fee for the semester.

17. Students should keep their vehicles only at the parking place allotted for the

purpose. Vehicle riding in the campus is strictly prohibited.

18. Sitting on the parapet wall and Riding beyond the parking limits, the fine will

be imposed to Rs.100.00

19. Breakage or loss of equipment /property as decided by the appropriate

authority The Principal/Director may, on the recommendation of the Head of

the Department, or otherwise, inflict the following punishments in the interests

of the student discipline and the Institution: fined, curtailment attendance,

denial of promotion to next semester, suspension, expulsion or such other

action as deemed necessary for the maintenance of discipline in the campus.

5.5. LAB CLASSES

All students must attend lab classes without fail. Those absent shall follow this

procedure laid down in the prescribed format explaining valid reasons and obtain

permission to attend the future classes.

5.6 FEE

1. All students admitted into this college, will be required to pay the prescribed

tuition fee and other specified fees. Failure of the same will result in the

cancellation of admission. No portion of fees will be refunded under any

circumstances. If any student wishes to change the college or discontinue the

course at any point for any reason, he \ she shall not be permitted to do so unless

he \ she pays balance amount of four years fees which he \ she would have to pay,

if he \she continued till the completion of the course. His \ Her original

certificates including I.e., etc., will be issued only after all the dues as stated

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 17

above, are cleared by the students. All senior students must pay the college fee

every year on or before the 15th of July irrespective of the reopening of the

college. If they fail the fine will be imposed as per norms of the management.

2. Miscellaneous fee paid for expenditure related to training programs i.e., technical

or soft skills etc., is not refundable.

3. Other than the above, if any fees are levied by the University the student has to be

pay the same.

5.7. TRANSPORT

All students who are availing the college bus facility must carry the bus-pass and

must produce when demanded, failing which they will not allowed to travel in the

bus. All students must travel in the allotted bus and routes. They should not change

but occupy only their allotted seats throughout. Unauthorized students caught in the

bus for not having the bus pass, should pay even if they traveled for one day also.

First and second year are not allowed to bring two-wheelers.

5.8. LIBRARY RULES

1. Library Books will be issued for 15 days time and renewal depends upon the

demand of the book.

2. Silence should be strictly maintained in the library.

3. Students are responsible for the library borrower card issued to them. Loss of the

library card should be reported in writing to the circulation section immediately.

Duplicate library borrower card will be issued on payment of Rs.150/- after a

week time from the date of application for duplicate cards.

4. The Library borrower card is not transferable.

5. Library books must be returned on or before the due date. Any student

failed to do so, 1st week –Rs.1/-per day/per book, 2nd week – Rs.2/-per day/per

book and 3rd week –Rs.3/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed From 4th

week-Rs.5/-per day/per book penalty will be imposed.

6. Students shall not make any sort of conversation in any part of the library, causing

inconvenience to others.

7. Students shall not bring their belongings inside the library and should keep them

outside the library.

8. Students leaving from the library should be checked at the exit.

9. Tearing of pages/stealing of books will invite suspension from using of the library

facilities and further disciplinary action will be taken against such students, as per

college norms.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 18

10. The borrower shall replace the New book within 7 days, otherwise, he/she has

to pay 3 times of the book cost, along with fine. In case of lose of book.

5.9. GENERAL

1. All the students admitted in this college have to give an undertaking to abide by

the rules and regulations of this college in prescribed format given by the

college.

2. All the students should attend the college after vacations (Dasara / Sankranthi /

Christmas / Semester term / summer) on the re-opening day without fail.

3. Students must deposit all the relevant original certificates and documents at

the time of the admission Office and they will not be returned until completion of

the course.

4. Admission of any student can be cancelled by the Management at any point

during the course for reasons which are not in consonance with the rules and

regulations and which are detrin the reputation of the college.

5. All the Students are here by informed that college authorities will not take any

responsibility for loss or theft of your valuable items and money kept in your

bags or some where else. Hence I request all the students are not to keep your

valuables in class room or anywhere without your presence.

6. Fee For Issue Of Duplicates

a) Duplicate Hall ticket Rs. 100.00

b) Duplicate Identity Card Rs. 100.00

c) Duplicate College Bus Pass Rs. 50.00

d) Duplicate Study Certificate for same purpose Rs. 50.00

e) Xerox copies of OD’s Rs. 50.00

All Breakage etc., penalties will be displayed on the Notice Board, and must be

paid by the student and no student will be allowed to write examination or internal

test or laboratory test, if penalties are not paid by the due date specified in the

notice or circular.

5.10. RAGGING

Ragging in any form inside or outside the college campus is banned/Prohibited

vide Ragging Act 26 of AP. legislative Assembly 1997. Those who indulge in this

uncivilized activity are liable for severe disciplinary actions besides being liable

for prosecution.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 19

SALIENT FEATURES

Ragging means doing an act which causes or is likely to cause insult 'or annoyance or

fear or apprehension or threat or intimidation or outrage of modesty or injury to a

student.

S.No. Nature of Ragging Punishment

1 Teasing, Embarrassing and Humiliating

Imprisonment Upto 6 Month

or Fine Upto Rs 1000/- or

Both.

2 Assaulting or using criminal Force or

criminal intimidation

Imprisonment Upto 1 Year or Fine

Upto Rs 2000/- or Both.

3 Wrongfully restraining or Confining or

causing hurt

Imprisonment Upto 2 Years or

Fine Upto Rs 5000/- or Both.

4 Causing grievous hurt kidnapping Or

raping or committing unnatural offence

Imprisonment Upto 5 Years or

Fine Upto Rs 10000/- or Both

5 Causing death or abating Suicide Imprisonment Upto 10 Years or

fine Upto Rs. 50000/- or Both

Note:

1. A student convicted of any of the above offences, will be, dismissed from the

college.

2. A student imprisoned for more than six months for any of the above offences 'will

not be admitted in any other College.

3. A student against whom there is prima facie evidence of ragging in any form will

be suspended from the college immediately.

Prohibition of Ragging

1.Ragging is prohibited as per act 26 of AP. Legislative assembly, 1997.

2.Ragging entails heavy fines and/or imprisonment.

3.Ragging invokes suspension and dismissal from the college.

4.Outsiders are prohibited from entering the college premises without permission.

5.All students must carry their identity cards and show them when Demanded.

6.The principal and staff will visit and inspect the rooms at any time.

7.Suspended students are debarred from entering the campus except when required to

attend enquiry and to submit an explanation .

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 20

6. ACADEMIC REGULATIONS R13 FOR B.TECH.

(REGULAR)

(Effective for the students admitted into I year from the Academic Year 2013-14

onwards)

6.1. AWARD OF B.TECH. DEGREE A Student will be declared eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree if he fulfills

the following academic regulations:

i) Pursued a course of study for not less than four academic years and not more

than eight academic years.

ii) Register for 200 credits and secure 200 credits.

iii)The candidate shall register for 224 credits and secure 216 credits with compulsory

subjects as listed in Table-1.

Table 1: Compulsory Subjects

Serial Number Subject Particulars

1 All practical subjects

2 Industry oriented mini project

3 Comprehensive Viva-Voce

4 Seminar

5 Project work

6.2. Students, who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the

degree within eight academic years from the year of their admission, shall forfeit their

seat in B.Tech Course.

6.3. COURSES OF STUDY

The following courses of study are offered at present as speciliaztions for the B.Tech

courses.

B ranch Code Branch

01 Civil Engineering

02 Electrical and Electronics Engineering

03 Mechanical Engineering

04 Electronics and Communication Engineering

05 Computer Science Engineering

08 Chemical Engineering

10 Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

12 Information Technology

14 Mechanical Engineering (Mechatronics)

17 Electronics and Telematics Engineering

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 21

18 Metallurgy and Material Engineering

19 Electronics and Computer Engineering

20 Mechanical Engineering (Productions)

21 Aeronautical Engineering

22 Instrumentation and Control Engineering

23 Biotechnology

24 Automobile Engineering

25 Mining Engineering

26 Mining Machinery

27 Petroleum Engineering

28 Civil and Environmental Engineering

29 Mechanical Engineering (Nano Technology)

30 Agricultural Engineering

31 Computer Science & Technology

6.4. CREDITS

I Year Semester

Periods / Week Credits Periods / Week Credits

Theory 03+1/03 06 04 04

02 04 --- ---

Practical 03 04 03 02

Drawing 02+03 06 03

06

02

04

Mini Project --- ---- --- 02

Comprehensive Viva

Voce --- -- --- 02

Seminar --- --- 6 02

Project --- --- 15 10

6.5 DISTRIBUTION AND WEIGHT AGE OF MARKS

i. The performance of a student in each semester / I year shall be evaluated

subject – wise with a maximum of 100 marks for theory and 75 marks for

practical subject. In addition, Industry oriented mini-project, seminar and

project work shall be evaluated for 50,50 and 200 marks respectively.

ii. For theory subjects the distribution shall be 25 marks for Internal

Evaluation and 75 marks for the End-Examination.

iii. For theory subjects, during the semester there shall be 2 midterm

examinations. Each mid term examintin consists of one objective paper,

one essay paper and one assignment. The objective paper and the minutes

(20 minutes for objective and 60 minutes for essay paper). The Objective

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 22

paper is set with 20 bits of multiple choice, fill in the blanks and matchinjg

type of questions for a total of 10 marks. The essay paper shall contain 4

full questions (one from each unit) out of which, the student has to answer 2

questions, each carrying 5 marks. While the first mid-term examination

shall be conducted on 1 to 2.5 units of the syllabus, the second mid-term

examination shall be conducted on 2.5 to 5 units. Five (5) marks are

allocated for Assignements (as specified by the subject teacher concerned).

The first Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the fiest

mid-examination, and the second Assignment should be submitted before

the conduct of the second mid-examination. The total marks secured by the

student in each mid-term examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the

average of the two mid-term examinations shall be taken as the final marks

secured by each candidate. However, in the I year, there shall be 3 mid

term examination, each for 25 marks, along with 3 assignments in a similar

pattern as above (Ist mid shall be from Unit- I, 2nd mid shall be 2 & 3 Units

and 3rd mid shall be 4 & 5 Units) and the average marks of the

examinations secured (each evaluated for a total of 25 marks) in each

subject shall be considred to be final marks for the internals/sessionals. If

any candidate is absent from any subject of a mid-term examination, an on-

line test will be conducted for him by the University.

The details of the Question Paper pattern wihtou deviating from the R13

regulations as notified in the webiste is as follows:

o The End semesters Examination will be conducted for 75 marks

which consists of two parts viz i) Part – A for 25 marks, ii) Part-B

for 50 marks.

o Part-A is compulsory question which consists of ten sub-questions.

The first five subquestions are from each unit and carries 2 marks

each. The next five sub-questions are one from each unit and

carriers 3 marks each.

o Part-B consists of five questions (numbered from 2 to 6) carrying

10 marks each. Each of these questions is from one unit and may

contain sub-questions. For each question there will be an “either’

“or” choice (that means there will be two questions from each unit

and the student should answer any one question)

iv. For practical subjects there shall be a continuous evaluation during the

semester for 25 sessional marks and 50 end examination marks. Out of the

25 marks for internal, day-to-day work in the laboratory shall be evaluated

for 15 marks and internal examination for practical shall be evaluated for 10

marks conducted by the concerned laboratory teacher. The end examination

shall be conducted with external examiner and laboratory teacher. The

external examiner shall be appointed from the cluster of colleges as decided

by the University examination branch.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 23

v. For the subject having design and / or drawing, (such as Engineering

Graphics, Engineering Drawing, Machine Drawing) and estimation, the

distribution shall be 25 marks for internal evaluation (15 marks for day-to-

day work and 10 marks for internal tests) and 75 marks for end

examination. There shall be two internal tests in a Semester and the better

of the two shall be considered for the award of marks for internal tests.

However in the I year class, there shall be three tests and the average of best

two will be taken into consideration.

vi. There shall be an industry-oriented mini-project, in collaboration with an

industry of their specialization, to be taken up during the vacation after III

year II semester examination. However, the mini project and its report shall

be evaluated with the project shall be submitted in report form and should

be presented before the committee, which shall be evaluated for 50 marks.

The committee consists of an external examiner, head of the department, the

supervisor of mini project and a senior faculty member of the department.

There shall be no internal marks for industry oriented mini project.

vii. There shall be a seminar presentation in IV year II semester. For the

seminar, the student shall collect the information on a specialized topic and

prepare a technical report, showing his understanding over the topic, and

submit to the department, which shall be evaluated by the Departmental

committee consisting of Head of the department, seminar supervisor and a

senior faculty member. The seminar report shall be evaluated for 50 marks.

There shall be no external examination for seminar.

viii. There shall be a comprehensive Viva-Voce in IV year II semester. The

Comprehensive Viva-Voce will be conducted by a Committee consisting of

(i) Head of the Department (ii) two Senior Faculty members of the

Department. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is aimed to assess the students’

understanding in various subjects he/she studied during the B.Tech course

of study. The comprehensive Viva-Voce is evaluated for 100 marks by the

Committee. There are no internal marks for the comprehensive viva-voce.

ix. Out of a total of 200 marks for the project work, 50 marks shall be for

Internal Evaluation and 150 marks for the End Semester Examination. The

End semester Examination (viva-voce) shall be conducted by the same

committee appointed for industry oriented mini project. In addition the

project supervisor shall also be included in the committee. The topics for

industry oriented mini project, seminar and project work shall be conducted

at the end of the IV year. The Internal Evaluation shall be on the basis of

two seminars given by each student on the topic of his project.

x. Laboratory marks and the sessional marks awarded by the college are not

final. They are subject to scrutiny and scaling by the University wherever

necessary. In such cases, the sessional and laboratory marks awarded by the

College will be referred to a Committee. The Committee will arrive at a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 24

scaling factor and the marks will be scaled as per the scaling factor. The

recommendations of the Committee are final and binding. The laboratory

records and internal test papers shall be preserved in the respective

institutions as per the University norms and shall be produced to the

Committees of the University as and when the same is asked for.

6.5 ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS:

i. A student shall be eligible to appear for University examinations if he acquires

a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.

ii. Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be condoned.

iii. Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above

and below 75%) in each semester or I year may be granted by the College

Academic Committee.

iv. A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he satisfies the

attendance requirement of the present semester / I year, as applicable. They may

seek re-admission for that semester / I year when offered next.

v. Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / I year

are not eligible to take their end examination of that class and their registration

shall stand cancelled.

vi. A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation of shortage of

attendance.

6.6 MINIMUM ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS: The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the

attendance requirements mentioned in item no.6

i. A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic

requirements and earned the credits allotted to each theory or practical design

or drawing subject or project if he secures not less than 35% of marks in the

end examination and a minimum of 40% of marks in the sum total of the

internal evaluation and end examination taken together.

ii. A student shall be promoted from II to III year only if he fulfills the academic

requirement of 37 credits from one regular and one supplementary

examinations of I year, and one regular examination of II year I semester

irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination or not.

iii. A student shall be promoted from third year to fourth year only if he fulfills

the academic requirements of total 62 credits from the following

examinations, whether the candidate takes the examinations or not.

a) Two regular and two supplementary examinations of I year.

b) Two regular and one supplementary examinations of I semester.

c) One regular and one supplementary examinations of II year II semester.

d) One regular examination of III year I Semester.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 25

iv. A student shall register and put up minimum attendance in all 200 credits

and earn the 200 credits. Marks obtained in all 200 credits shall be considered

for the calculation of percentage of marks.

v. Students who fail to earn 200 credits as indicated in the course structure

within eight academic years from the year of their admission shall forfeit their

seat in B.Tech course and their admission shall stand cancelled.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 26

7.0 COURSE CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR

Description Period Duration

I Sem

Commencement of Classwork 29-06-2015

1st Spell of Instructions 29-06-2015 22-08-2015 (8 weeks)

I mid term exams 24-08-2015 29-08-2015 (1 week)

2nd Spell of Instructions 31-08-2015 17-10-2015 (8 weeks)

II mid term exams 26-10-201 31-10-2015 (1 weeks)

Preparations & Practical

Examinations 02-11-2015 07-11-2015 (1 weeks)

End Examinations 09-11-2015 21-11-2015 (2 weeks)

II Sem

Commencement of Classwork 07-12-2015

1st Spell of Instructions 07-12-2015 30-01-2016 (8 weeks)

I mid term exams 01-02-2016 06-02-2016 (1 week)

2nd Spell of Instructions 22-02-2016 16-04-2016 (8 weeks)

II mid term exams 18-04-2016 23-04-2016 (1 weeks)

Preparations & Practical

Examinations 25-04-2016 30-04-2016 (1 weeks)

End Examinations 02-05-2016 14-05-2016 (2 weeks)

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 27

8. III YEAR MECH COURSE STRUCTURE

CODE SUBJECT L P C

A50010 Managerial Economics & Financial Analysis 4 - 4

A50318 Engineering Metrology 4 - 4

A50317 Dynamics Of Machinery 4 - 4

A50321 Machine Tools 4 - 4

A50316 Design of Machine Members –I 4 - 4

A50326 Thermal Engineering - II 4 - 4

A50384 Machine Tools & Metrology Lab - 3 2

A50383 Thermal Engineering Lab - 3 2

Total 24 6 28

Note: All End Examinations (Theory and Practical) are of three hours

duration.

T – Tutorial L-Theory P- Practical C – Credits

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 28

9.0 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ANALYSIS

9.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code : A50010

Course Title : MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL

ANALYSIS Course Category : CORE

Course Structure

: Lecture

s

Tutorial

s

Practical’

s

Credit

s 4 - - 4

Course Coordinator : C.Prasanth, Anil Kumar

Team of Instructors : C.Prasanthi

COURSE OVERVIEW:

Course is designed in such a way that it gives an overview of concepts of Economics.

Managerial Economics enables students to understand micro environment in which

markets operate how price determination is done under different kinds of

competitions. Financial Analysis gives clear idea about concepts, conventions and

accounting procedures along with introducing students to fundamentals of ratio

analysis and interpretation of financial statements. Break Even Analysis is very

helpful to the Business Concern for Decision Making, controlling and forward

Strategic Planning. Ratio analysis gives an idea about financial forecasting, financial

planning, controlling the business and decision making.

9.2 PREREQUISITES: Leve

l Credit

s Periods /

Week Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Managerial

Economics and

Financial Analysis

the second Assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the

second mid. The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average of the two

midterm examinations shall be taken as the final marks secured by

each candidate

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 29

9.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each

question carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination

shall be conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5

units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid.

The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average

of the two midterm examinations shall be taken as the

final marks secured by each candidate.

75 100

9.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 30

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

I. To enable the student to analyze and understanding the concepts of

Managerial Economics, Demand Analysis, Elasticity of Demand and

Demand Forecasting. .

II. To provide the student with an understanding of the production theories,

analysis and cost analysis while dealing with the production and factors of

production.

III. To provide the student with an understanding of different market structures

and price and output determination in different market structures.

IV. To give the student an understanding the features and evaluation of different forms of Business Organizations, New Economic Environment, significance of Capital and

capital budgeting methods.

v. To enable the student to analyze and understanding the significance of

financial analysis through Ratio Analysis for Decision making, Financial

forecasting, planning, controlling the business and acquiring the

knowledge on financial accounting and

management accounting.

9.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

1. Understand the Managerial Economics deals with the economic activities

performed by the businessmen

2. It deals with the significance of demand, its analysis, measurement of demand and its forecasting

3. It explains the production function through the Cobb Douglas Production Function.

4. It introduces to the different structures of market covering how price is

determined under different market structures.

5. Different forms of business organizations existing in the modern business can

be very well understood under its scope.

6. The allocation of capital which plays a vital role in a business organization is learnt.

7. The double entry book keeping will give an exposure to the maintenance of

books of records and allocation of profits in an enterprise.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 31

9.6 HOW COURSE OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program

Outcomes

Level Proficiency

assessed by a Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use basic

knowledge in mathematics, science, Managerial

Economics, Financial Accounting and engineering and

apply them to solve problems specific to mechanical

engineering (Fundamental engineering analysis

skills).

S

Assignments,

Exams.

b Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design and

conduct experiments, interpret and analyze data, and

report results (Information retrieval skills).

H Assignments,

Exams.

c Graduates will demonstrate the An ability to design a

system, component, or process to meet desired needs

within appropriate constraints for public Health,

safety, cultural, societal and environmental

considerations.(Creative skills).

S

Assignments,

Exams

d Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function as a

coherent unit in multidisciplinary design teams, and

deliver results through collaborative research

(Teamwork).

S

--

e Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify,

formulate and solve mechanical engineering problems

of a complex kind(Engineering problem solving

skills).

H Assignments,

Exams

f Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their

professional and ethical responsibilities, and use

technology for the benefit of mankind (Professional

integrity).

S Assignments,

Exams

g Graduates will be able to communicate effectively in

both verbal and written forms (Speaking / Writing

skills).

H Presentations

h Graduates will have the confidence to apply

engineering solutions in global and societal contexts

(Engineering impact assessment skills).

H Assignments,

Exams.

i Graduates should be capable of self-education and

clearly understand the value of life-long learning

(Continuing education awareness).

S Assignments,

Exams

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 32

j Graduates will develop an open mind and have an

understanding of the impact of engineering on society

and demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues

(Social awareness).

S

--

k Graduates will be familiar with applying software

methods and modern computer tools to analyze

mechanical engineering problems (Software

hardware interface).

S

--

l Graduates will have the ability to recognize the

importance of professional development by pursing

post graduate studies or face competitive examinations

that offer challenging and rewarding careers in

Mechanical Engineering (Successful career and

immediate employment).

S

Assignments,

Exams

S=Supportive H=Highly Related

9.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I

Introduction & Demand Analysis: Introduction to Managerial Economics: Definition, Nature and Scope of Managerial

Economics – Demand Analysis: Demand Determinants, Law of Demand and its

exceptions.

Elasticity of Demand: Definition, Types, Measurement and Significance of Elasticity

of Demand. Demand Forecasting, Factors governing demand forecasting, methods of

demand forecasting.

UNIT-II

Production & Cost Analysis: Theory of Production and Cost Analysis: Production Function – Iso-quants and Iso-

costs, MRTS, Least Cost Combination of Inputs, Cobb-Douglas Production function,

Laws of Returns, Internal and External Economies of Scale.

Cost Analysis: Cost concepts, Opportunity cost, Fixed vs. Variable costs, Explicit costs

vs. Implicit costs, out of pocket costs vs. Imputed costs, Break-even analysis,

Determination of Break – Even point (Simple Problems) , Managerial Significance of

BEA.

UNIT-III

Markets & New Economic Environment: Market structures: Types of competition, Features of perfect competition, Monopoly and

monopolistic competition.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 33

Price determination& Price Statistics: Price Output determination in case of perfect

competition and monopoly. Pricing objectives and policies of pricing, Methods of

pricing.

Business & New Economic Environment Business features and evaluation of different forms of Business organization: Sole

proprietorship, partnership, Joint Stock Company, public enterprises and their types,

New Economic Environment: changing business environment in post-liberalization

scenario.

UNIT-IV

Capital Budgeting:

Capital and its significance, types of capital, estimation of fixed and working capital

requirements, methods and sources of raising capital- Trading Forecast, Capital budget,

Cash Budget. Features of capital budgeting proposals, methods of capital budgeting –

payback method, Accounting rate of return (ARR), Net Present Value Method (simple

problems).

UNIT-V Introduction to Financial Accounting and Financial Analysis: Accounting Concepts

and Conventions, Introduction to IFRS– Double – Entry Book keeping, Journal, Ledger,

Trial balance, Final accounts (Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance

Sheet with simple adjustments.)

Financial Analysis through Ratios: Significance, limitations of Ratio Analysis and

Ratios Computation, Analysis and Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios (Current Ratio and

quick ratio). Activity Ratios (Inventory turnover ratio and Debtor Turnover ratio),

Capital structure Ratios (Debt-Equity ratio, Interest Coverage ratio) and profitability

ratios (Gross profit Ratio, Net profit ratio, Operating Ratio, P/E Ratio and EPS), Du Pont

Chart.

TEXT BOOKS:

1.A.R. Aryasri (2007) Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, 3nd Ed, TMH.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Managerial Economics, Dwivedi, 5th Ed, Vikas Publication House Pvt.Ltd.

2. Financial Accounting, S.N. Maheshwari & S.K.Maheshwari, 4th

Ed, Vikas Publication House Pvt.Ltd. 3. Financial Accounting, R.Narayana Swamy, Third Ed, PHI

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 34

9.8 COURSE PLAN:

The course plan is meant as a guideline. There may probably be changes.

Lecture

No.

Course Learning Outcomes Topics to be covered Re

fer

en

ce 1-2

Introduction Able to Explain about

managerial economics according

to the business

UNIT-I Introduction to Managerial

Economics: Definition, Nature

and Scope.

T1,R1

3-4

Able to Describe about demand

analysis, the Law of Demand and

Demand Function.

Demand Analysis: Demand

Determinants of Demand,

Definitions, assumptions and

exceptions of Law

T1,R1

5-9

Able to Understand elasticity

of the demand of the product,

different types, Measurement of

Elasticity of Demand and

Factors influencing on

Elasticity of Demand.

Definitions, Significance of

Elasticity of Demand, Types

and Measurement of Elasticity

of Demand and Factors

influencing. T1,R1

12-16

Able to Understand the

Production function, features of

Iso-Quants and Iso- Costs,

different types of Internal

Economies, External Economies

and Law of Returns with

appropriate examples

UNIT-II Production function, features of

Iso-Quants, Iso-Costs, MRTS,

Least Cost Combination of

Inputs and Cobb-Douglas

Production Function, Different

types of Internal Economies,

External Economies and Law of

Returns.

T1,R3

17 Able to Classify different types

of costs

Cost concepts, fixed vs

Variable costs, explicit vs

implicit costs & costs. T1,R3

18

Able Identify the Significance

and Limitations of Break-Even

Analysis

Break-even Analysis (BEA).

Managerial Significance of

BEA. T1,R3

19-26 Able to Calculate the Break-

Even Point (Simple Problems)

Determination of Break-Even

Point (Simple Problems) T1,R3

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 35

27-30

Able to Discuss the Objectives, Policies and Methods of Pricing Strategies

and Price Methods.

Objectives and Policies of Pricing-Methods of Pricing: Cost

Plus Pricing, Marginal Cost

Pricing, Sealed Bid Pricing,

Going Rate Pricing, Limit

Pricing Market Skimming

Pricing, Penetration Pricing,

Two-Part Pricing, Block Pricing,

Bundling Pricing, Peak Load

Pricing, Cross Subsidization

T1,R3

31-35

Able to Describe Features of business, Definitions of Various forms of

Business Units.

Characteristic features of Business, Definitions, Features,

Joint Stock Company. T1,R3

36-38

Able to Predict the Merits & Demerits of Different types of Public

Enterprises and Changing Business

Environment to Post Liberalization

Scenario.

Definitions, Features, Merits and Demerits of Public

Enterprises and their types

liberalization scenario T1,R3

39-45

Able to Explain the significance and classification of capital, Methods and

Sources of Raising Finance.

Capital and its significance,

Types of Capital, Working

capital requirements, Methods

and sources of rising finance,.

Trading Forecast, Capital

Budget and Cash Budget.

T1,R4

46-49

Able to Illustrate the Significance of Financial Accounting, Double

Entry, Accounts, Accounting

Concepts and Conventions

Significance of Financial

Accounting and Accounting

Terminology.

and Accounting Cycle.

T1,R4

50-58

Able to Examine the meaning, advantages and Limitations of the

Journal, Ledger and Trial Balance

and Final Accounts and Solve

simple Problems.

Meaning, Advantages and Limitations of the Journal,

Ledger and Trial Balance and

Final Accounts and Simple

Problems from Journal, Ledger,

Trail Balance and Final

Accounts with simple

adjustments.

T1,R4

59 Able to Describe Meaning, Definitions and Limitations of Ratio Analysis

Meaning, Definitions and Limitations of Ratio Analysis.

T1,R

4 60-65 Able to Compute different types of Computation, Analysis and T1,R4

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 36

9.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Objective

s

Progr

am

Outco

mes

a b c d e f g h i j k l

I S H S H S H H S S S

II S H S H S S S S S S

III H S S H S H S

I

V

S H S S H S H S S S S

V S H H S H S S S S

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

9.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

THE PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Course

Outcome

s

Progr

am

Outco

mes

a b c d e f g h i j k l

1 S H S S H H H S S

2 S S S S H H S S S

3 S H S S H H S S S

4 S H S H S S

5 S H H H H S S S

6 S H S H S S S S S

7 S H S S H S S H S S

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 37

9.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-1

1) The statements that contain the word ‘ought to’ are called [ b ]

a)prescriptive

b)normative

c)assertive

d)negative

2) Managerial economics is close to [ a ]

a)Micro economics

b)Macro economics

c)Theory of income and Employment

d)Theory of Wages and Employment

3) Which of the following is NOT a problem of business [ d ]

a)Optimization of inputs

b) minimization of costs

c)maximization of revenue

d) increased property tax collection

4) Who said that economics is the study of nature and uses of national wealth? [ c ]

a)paul A.samuelson

b)prof. lionel Robbins

c)Adam Smith

d)Alfred Marshal

5) “Economics is the study of scarce resources and unlimited wants”.Who said this?[ b]

a) paul A.samuelson

b) prof. lionel Robbins

c) Adam Smith

d) Alfred Marshal

6) Which of the following cannot be verified by looking at the facts ? [ c ]

a)positive statement

b)prescriptive actions

c)normative statement

d)Welfare statement

7) Which of the following is not covered by Managerial Economics [ d ]

a)price –output decision

b)profit related decision

c)investment decision

d)foreign direct investment (FDI)decision

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 38

8) The pre-requisite for rational decision making is [ b ]

a)logical analysis of one’s choices without error

b)consistency between goals and choices

c)rigidly defined choices

d) choices not involving any trade-offs

9 ) Which of the following is a normative statement ? [ a ]

a)Reducing inequality should be a major priority for mixed economies

b) Reducing inequality Would be a major priority for mixed economies

c) Reducing inequality could be a major priority for mixed economies

d) Reducing inequality might be a major priority for mixed economies

10) Which of the following indicates micro approach from national perspective ?

[ a ]

a)lock out in a factory b)per capita income of the country c)total investments in india

d)none

UNIT-2

1. Who explained the “Law of Demand”? ( c )

(a) Joel Dean (b) Cobb-Douglas

(c) Marshall (d) C.I.Savage & T.R.Small

2. Demand Curve always ________ sloping. ( c )

(a) Positive (b) Straight line (c) Negative (d) Vertical

3. Geffen goods, Veblan goods and speculations are exceptions to___. ( c )

(a) Cost function (b) Production function

(c) Law of Demand (d) Finance function

4. Who explained the “Law of Demand”? ( c )

(a) Cobb-Douglas (b) Adam smith

(c) Marshall (d) Joel Dean

5. When PE = (Price Elasticity of Demand is infinite), we call it ___. ( c )

(a) Relatively Elastic (b) Perfectly Inelastic

(c) Perfectly Elastic (d) Unit Elastic

6. Income Elasticity of demand when less than ‘O’ (IE = O), it is

termed as _______. ( c )

(a) Income Elasticity less than unity (b) Zero income Elasticity

(c) Negative Income Elasticity (d) Unit Income Elasticity

7. The other name of inferior goods is _______. ( c )

(a) Veblan goods (b) Necessaries

(c) Geffen goods (d) Diamonds

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 39

8. Estimation of future possible demand is called ______. ( c )

(a) Sales Forecasting (b) Production Forecasting

(c) Income Forecasting (d) Demand Forecasting

9. How many methods are employed to forecast the demand ( c )

(a) Three (b) Four (c) Two (d) Five

10. What is the formula for Price Elasticity of Demand? ( c )

(a) % of change in the Price (b) % of change in the Demand

% of change in the Demand % of change in the Income

(c) % of change in the Demand (d) % of change in the Demand of ‘X’

% of change in the Price % of change in the Price of ‘Y’

11. When a small change in price leads great change in the quantity demand,

We call it ________. ( c )

(a) Inelastic Demand (b) Negative Demand

(c) Elastic Demand (d) None

12. When a great change in price leads small change in the quantity demand,

We call it ________.

( c )

(a) Elastic Demand (b) Positive Demand

(c) Inelastic Demand (d) None

13. “Coffee and Tea are the ________ goods”. ( c )

(a) Relative (b) Complementary

(c) Substitute (d) None

14. Consumers Survey method is one of the Survey Methods to forecast the__. ( c )

(a) Sales (b) Income

(c) Demand (d) Production

15. What is the formula for Income Elasticity of Demand? ( c )

(a) % of change in the Income (b) % of change in the Demand

% of change in the Demand % of change in the Price

(c) % of change in the Demand (d) % of change in the Demand of ‘X’

% of change in the Income % of change in the Price of ‘Y’

16. What is the formula for Cross Elasticity of Demand? ( c )

(a) % of change in the Price of ‘X’ (b) % of change in the Demand

% of change in the Demand of ‘Y” % of change in the Price

(c) % of change in the Demand of ‘X’ (d) % of change in the Demand

% of change in the Price of ‘Y’ % of change in the Income

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 40

17. When PE = 0 (Price Elasticity of Demand is Zero), we call it ___. ( c )

(a) Relatively Elastic demand (b) Perfectly Elastic demand

(c) Perfectly Inelastic demand (d) Unit Elastic demand

18. When PE =>1 (Price Elasticity of Demand is greater than one),

We call it ___. ( c )

(a) Perfectly Elastic demand (b) Perfectly inelastic demand

(c) Relatively Elastic demand (d) relatively inelastic demand

19. When PE =<1 (Price Elasticity of Demand is less than one),

We call it ___. ( c )

(a) Perfectly inelastic demand (b) Relatively Elastic demand

(c) Relatively inelastic demand (d) perfectly Elastic demand

20. When PE =1 (Price Elasticity of Demand is one), we call it ___. ( c )

(a) Perfectly Elastic demand (b) Perfectly inelastic demand

(c) Unit elastic demand (d) Relatively Elastic demand

21. When Income Elasticity of demand is Zero (IE = 0), It is termed as ___. ( c )

(a) Negative Income Elasticity (b) Unit Income Elasticity

(c) Zero Income Elasticity (d) Infinite Income Elasticity

UNIT-3

1) Isoquants are also called ( a )

A) Isoproduct curves B) isocost curves C) price difference curve D) indifference

curve

2) Production function is not a factor of ( c )

A) Land B) Labour C) cost of capital D) Organization

3) If the level of production of changes the total cost changes and thus isocost curve ( b )

A) Moves downwards B) Moves upwards C) Moves in a linear fashion

D) Moves in a linear fashion

4) In cob-Douglas production function “k” refers to ( c )

A) Land B) Labour C) Capital D) Organization

5) The difference between the total revenue and total cost is called ( c )

A) Cost of production B) Cost of capital C) Profit D) Capital

6) Long run cost curves are called ( d )

A) Operating curves B) Fixed curves C) Variable curves D) planning curves

7) Which of the following are fixed in the short run? ( c )

A) Variable costs B) Semi variable costs C) Fixed costs D) semi fixed costs

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 41

8) When do the fixed costs vary? ( b )

A) In the short run B) In the long run C) In 2 years D) Less than 2 years

9) Which of the following level of production denotes break-even point? ( a )

A) Minimum B) Maximum C) Constant D) Diminishing

UNIT-4

1. Organisation management and control are closely held by ( a )

(a) sole trader (b) departmenttal undertaking

(c) patnership (d) joint stock company

2. The closere of patenership is called ……….. ( d )

(a) resolution (b) revolution

(c) solution (d) dissolution

3. To start a patenership firm a minimum of……… and maximum of……….is required

to carry on non-banking business. ( d )

(a)2 and 10 (b) 7 and unlimited

( c) 2 and 50 (d) 2 and 20.

4. Indian companies Act was enacted in ( d )

(a) 1956 (b) 1936

(c) 1947 (d) 1950

5. F is a sole properater ,D is admitted as a patner where D does not bring any capital

then, ( a )

(a) D and F are patners (b) D is not patner as no capital is brought in

(c) D is to be treated as an employee (d) F is the principal

6. A patner who lends his name to the firm without having any real interest is called as

…… ( c )

(a) Ostensible patner (b) Slepping patner or dormant patner

(c) Nominal patner (d) Patner by Estoppel

7 . Environment is basically ………… in nature and the business firm is … ( d )

(a) progressive,prospective (b) progressive,monetary

(c) micro,macro (d) macro,micro

8. SLR refers to ( c )

(a) Standard Lending rate (b) Statutory Lending Ratio

(c) Statutory Liquidity ratio (d) Statutory Rate

9. Globalisation is characterised by ( a )

(a) reduction of trade barriers (b) reduction of performance barrier

(c) ineffective environment (d)dispersed flow techonology

10. Monopolies are done away with ( b )

(a) taxation policy (b) deregulation policy

(c) monetary policy (d) fiscal policy

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 42

UNIT-5

1. The structure of market is not based on ________ ( d )

a) degree of seller concentration b)degree of buyer concentration

c)degree of product differentiation d)condition of exit from market

2. Perfect competition is based on ______ ( d )

a)few numbers of buyers and sellers b)heterogenous products and services

c)each firm is a price maker d)perfect mobility of factors of production

3. In a perfect competition,the demand curve for an individual firm is horizontal and ( b )

a)perfectly inelastic b)perfectly elastic

c)unit elasticity d)none of the above

4. Under perfect competition, the price is equal to ( a )

a) AR=MR b)AR>MR

c) MR>AR d)MR not equal to AR

5. Based on number of sellers,imperfect markets are categorized as ( c )

a) monopsony b) duopsony

c)monopolistic competition d) oligopsony

6. Which of the following refers to a positin where a firm enjoys maximum profits and

has no incentive either to reduce or increase its output level? ( c )

a)break even point b)point of inference

c)equilibrium point d)sensitivity point

7. Price in long run is called as ( d )

a)standard price b)retail price

c)market price d)normal price

8. The basis of price discrimination is not due to ( d )

a)purchasing power b)preferential pricing

c)differential pricing d) none of the above

9. Monopoly is not socially desirable as ( d )

a)efficient allocation of resources

b)lessen the gap of rich and poor

c)extend the slope for research and development

d)it leads to exploitation of consumers

10. Which of the following is not feature of monopoly? ( d )

a)single firm b)incudes no close substitutes nor competitors

c)products with elastic demand d)certain statutory privileges

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 43

9.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

UNIT-I 1) Define managerial economics illustrate? How it helps in solving managerial problems?

2) Define managerial economics explain its nature and scope?

3) Explain the nature of demand what could be the different variations in the nature of

demand?

4) What is demand function? Hoe do you determine it?

5) Differentiate extension in demand and increase in demand illustrate ?

UNIT-II 1) What do you understand by elasticity of demand? Explain the factors governing it?

2) Explain how do you measure elasticity of demand. illustrate how do you interpret the

different types of elasticity ?

3) For the following series of observations obtain 5 yearly cantered moving average

S.No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Demand 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100

4) What do you understand by demand forecasting explain different methods of demand

forecasting explain different methods of demand forecasting?

5) .”statistical and mathematical techniques complicate the process of demand forecasting

do you agree support your answer?

UNIT-III 1) Define production function? How can a producer find it useful Illustrate?

2) Discuss the economics of scale that occur to an firm?

3) Define cost. Explain the different cost concepts used in the process of cost analysis?

4) Explain how the short run and long run influence the cost.

5) How cost output relationship helps the entrepreneurs in expansion decision?

UNIT-IV 1) Differentiate between perfect and imperfect markets

2) Explain how the price is determine in case of perfect competition illustrate?

3) Explain any four methods of pricing based on strategy?

4) What strategies do you recommend for the markets with stiff competition conditions?

5) A firm has a fixed cost of Rs 10,000. Selling price per unit is Rs 5. and variable cost per

unit is Rs 3.

a. Determine Break Even Point in terms of volume and also sales value

b. Calculate the margin of safety considering that the actual production is 8000

units.

UNIT-V 1) Discuss the factors affecting the choice of form of business organization.

2) What do u understand by joint stock company? Do you think the criticism leveled against

it is correct?

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 44

3) What do you understand by liberalization ,privatization and globalization ? explain their

impact on the Indian economy in the recent years.

4) What do you mean by ‘privatization’? explain different forms in which privatization can

be initiated.

5) ‘globalization is a means of attaining international standard of living ‘. Do you agree with

this statement ? support your answer.

9.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

UNIT-I 1. Explain the nature of demand what could be the different variations in the nature of

demand?

2. What is demand function? Hoe do you determine it?

3. Define managerial economics illustrate? How it helps in solving managerial problems?

UNIT-II 1. What do you understand by elasticity of demand? Explain the factors governing it?

2. Explain how do you measure elasticity of demand. illustrate how do you interpret the

different types of elasticity ?

3. What do you understand by demand forecasting explain different methods of demand

forecasting explain different methods of demand forecasting?

UNIT-III 1. Discuss the economics of scale that occur to an firm?

2. Define cost. Explain the different cost concepts used in the process of cost analysis?

3. Explain how the short run and long run influence the cost.

UNIT-IV 1. Explain how the price is determine in case of perfect competition illustrate?

2. What strategies do you recommend for the markets with stiff competition conditions?

3. Explain any four methods of pricing based on strategy?

UNIT-V 1. What do you understand by liberation ,privatization and globalization ? explain their

impact on the indian economy in the recent years.

2. What do you mean by ‘privatization’? explain different forms in which privatization

can be initiated.

3. ‘globalization is a means of attaining international standard of living ‘. Do you agree

with this statement ? support your answer.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 45

10. ENGINEERING METROLOGY 10.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION FORM

Course Title ENGINEERING METROLOGY

Course Code A50318

Regulation R13 – JNTUH

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

4 1 - 4

Course Coordinator G.Hima Bindu, K.Shravan Kumar,

Team of Instructors M.Anil Kumar

COURSE OVERVIEW:

To provide a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed by

personnel working in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement

process, types and correct use of measurement and test equipment, and measurement

standards. It provides an opportunity for students to learn about measurement uncertainty

and risk analysis. The course includes the procedures necessary to set up and to have

knowledge on calibration.

At the end of this subject the student is expected it is expected to enforce, validate and

verify predefined standards for traceability, accuracy, reliability, and precision. All of

these are factors that would affect the validity of measurement. Although these standards

vary widely, these are mandated by the government, the agencies, and some treaties.

Consequently, these standards are verified and tested against a recognized quality system

in calibration laboratories.

10.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods / Week Prerequisites

UG 4 5

Production technology,

Machine Drawing

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 46

10.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTION:

Sessional Marks

University End Total

Exam marks marks

Mid Semester Test There shall be two midterm examinations. Each midterm examination consists of subjective type and objective type tests. The subjective test is for 10 marks of 60 minutes duration. Subjective test of shall contain 4 questions; the student has to answer 2 questions, each carrying 5 marks. The objective type test is for 10 marks of 20 minutes duration. It consists of 10 Multiple choice and 10 objective type questions, the student has to answer all the questions and each carries half mark. First midterm examination shall be conducted for the first two and half units of syllabus and second midterm examination shall be conducted for the remaining portion.

75 100

Sessional Marks

University End Total

Exam marks marks

Assignment Five marks are earmarked for assignments. There shall be two assignments in every theory course. Marks shall be awarded considering the average of two assignments in each course.

10.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Marks Duration

1 I Mid Examination 80 minutes 20

2 I Assignment - 05

3 II Mid Examination 80 minutes 20

4 II Assignment - 05

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 47

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

I. To be familiar with the different instruments those are available for linear,

angular, roundness and roughness measurements.

II. To be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc.)

III. It is the aim of this course to provide students with practical skills associated

with each of these areas. Metrology activities include precision measurement of

component features, form and geometry utilizing specialized measuring

instruments and equipment.

IV. Effectively designing product processing methods.

V. To enhance the ability of students to apply scientific methods of protection

10.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

1. Graduates will demonstrate basic knowledge in mathematics, science and

engineering

2. Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their professional and ethical

responsibilities

3. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function on engineering and science

laboratory teams, as well as on multidisciplinary design teams

4. Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solve

mechanical engineering problems

5. Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and

societal contexts. Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly

understand the value of life-long learning. Graduates will have ability to

communicate in written, oral and graphical forms.

10.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level

Proficiency assessed by

A Graduates will demonstrate the ability to use basic knowledge in mathematics, science and engineering and apply them to solve problems specific to mechanical engineering (Fundamental engineering analysis skills).

H Assignments, Tutorials, Exams

B Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design and conduct experiments, interpret and analyze data, and report results (Information retrieval skills).

S Project work

C Graduates will demonstrate the ability to design any mathematical system or thermal that meets desired specifications and requirements (Creative skills).

S Assignments, Tutorials, Exams

D Graduates will demonstrate the ability to function as a coherent unit in multidisciplinary design teams, and deliver results through collaborative research (Teamwork).

S Project work

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 48

E Graduates will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solve mechanical engineering problems of a complex kind (Engineering problem solving skills).

H Assignments, Exams

F Graduates will demonstrate an understanding of their professional and ethical responsibilities, and use technology for the benefit of mankind(Professional integrity).

H Assignments, Tutorials,

G Graduates will be able to communicate effectively in both verbal and written forms (Speaking / writing skills).

S --

H Graduates will have the confidence to apply engineering solutions in global and national contexts (Engineering impact assessment skills).

H Assignments, Tutorials,

I Graduates should be capable of self-education and clearly understand the value of life-long learning (Continuing education awareness).

H Assignments, Tutorials,

J Graduates will develop an open mind and have an understanding of the impact of engineering on society and demonstrate awareness of contemporary issues (Social awareness).

S --

K Graduates will be familiar with applying software methods and modern computer tools to analyze mechanical engineering problems (Software hardware interface).

H --

L Graduates will have the ability to recognize the importance of professional development by pursing post graduate studies or face competitive examinations that offer challenging and rewarding careers in Mechanical Engineering (Successful career andimmediate employment).

S Gate exam, Job interviews

M Graduate will be able to design a system to meet desired needs within environmental, economic, political, ethical health and safety, manufacturability and management knowledge and techniques to estimate time, resources to complete project (Practical engineering analysis skills).

H Assignments, Tutorials, Exams

N = N = None S = Supportive H = Highly Related

10.7 SYLLABUS

UNIT-1

Systems of limits and fits: Introduction, normal size, tolerance limits, deviations,

allowance, fits and their types - unilateral and bilateral tolerance system, hole and shaft

basis systems – interchangeability and selective assembly. Indian standard Institution

system - British standard system, International Standard system for plain ad screwed

work.

UNIT - II

LINEAR MEASUREMENT : Length standard, line and end standard, slip gauges -

calibration of the slip gauges, Dial indicator, micrometers.MEASUREMENT OF

ANGLES AND TAPERS : Different methods - Bevel protractor - angle slipgauges –

spirit levels - sine bar - Sine plate, rollers and spheres used to determine the tapers.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 49

LIMIT GAUGES : Taylors principle - Design of go and No go gauges, plug ring, snap,

gap, taper, profile and position gauges.

UNIT - III

OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS : Tool maker's microscope and its uses -

collimators, optical projector - optical flats and their uses, interferometer.

FLAT SURFACE MEASUREMENT : Measurement of flat surfaces - instruments used -

straight edges- surface plates - optical flat and auto collimator.

UNIT - IV

SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT : Differences between surface roughness

and surfacewaviness-Numerical assessment of surface finish - CLA,R, R.M.S Values - Rz

values, Rz value, Methodsof measurement of surface finish-profilograph. Talysurf, ISI

symbols for indication of surface finish.

UNIT-V

SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT : Element of measurement - errors in screw threads

- measurementof effective diameter, angle of thread and thread pitch, profile thread

gauges.

MEASUREMENT THROUGH COMPARATORS : Comparators - Mechanical, Electrical

and ElectronicComparators, pneumatic comparators and their uses in mass production.

MACHINE TOOL ALIGNMENT TESTS : Requirements of Machine Tool Alignment

Tests, Alignmenttests on lathe, milling, drilling machine tools.. Preparation of acceptance

charts.

GEAR MEASUREMENT: Gear measuring instruments, Gear tooth profile measurement.

Measurement of diameter, pitch pressure angle and tooth thickness.Coordinate Measuring

Machines: Types of CMM, Role of CMM, and Applications of CMM.

TEXT BOOKS :

1. Engineering Metrology / I C Gupta./ Danpath Rai

2. Engineering Metrology / R.K. Jain / Khanna Publishers

REFERENCES :

1. BIS standards on Limits & Fits, Surface Finish, Machine Tool Alignment etc.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 50

10.8 COURSEPLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following course learning

outcomes.(The course plan is meant as a guideline. There may probably be changes.

Lecture

No.

Course Learning

Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference

1

Classify of Measuring

Instruments and

Measuring methods

Basic measuring elements, classification

of measuring instruments and measuring

methods

T1

2 Define Limit, Normal

Size , Allowance

Limits , upper limit, lower limit, tolerance

normal size, deviations and allowance.

T1

3 List Out the types of

Writing Tolerance

System of limits. Unilateral system,

Bilateral system. Maximum metal limit,

Least metal limit.

T1

4 Classify the Types of

Fits

Fit. Classification of fits, clearance fit,

interference fit and transition fit.

T1

5 Illustrate the Fits and

Limits Terminology for fit and limits. T1

6

Describe

interchangeability,

selective assembly.

System obtaining for different types of

fit. Hole basis system and Shaft basis

system, interchangeability, selective

assembly.

T1

7

Define ISI system,

British standard

system,

ISI system, British standard system,

International standard system for plain

and screwed work, problems solved .

T1

8

Evaluate Converting

hole based system fit

into an equivalent shaft

based fit.

Converting hole based system fit into an

equivalent shaft based fit.

T1

9 Write the Basic Units

Linear measurement. Basic units. Meter

standard, yard standard. T1

10

Distinguish Between

Line standard and end

standard

Line standard, end standard, calibration

of end standard T1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 51

11

Use of Slip gauges For

Linear Measurement

Slip gauges, calibration of slip gauges,

grade of slip gauges, wringing and care

of slip gauges.

T1

12 Identify the Errors In

Dial Indicator Dial indicator uses and sources of errors. T1

16+ Identify the Errors In

Micrometer Micrometers uses and sources of errors. T1

14

List out the

Instruments for

measurement of

Angles

Measurement of angles and tapers. Sine

bar, slip gauges bevel protractor. T1

15

Explain The Principle

of Sprit Level

Spirit level, sine plate. Rollers and

spheres used to determine the angle of

tapers.

T1

16 Use of Angle Gauges Angle gauges. Problems solved. T1

17

Demonstrate how to

check the angle of taper

workspace and holes.

To check the angle of taper workspace

and holes. Problems solved. T1

18

List out the types of

Gauges

Gauges, types of gauges, plug, ring, snap

and plane gauges.

T1

19

Apply The Taylor’s

Principle in Designing

Of gauges

Taylor's principle- Design of GO and

NOGO gauges.

T1

20 Explain Optical

measuring instruments. Optical measuring instruments. T2

21

Illustrate the Working

of Tool maker's

microscope

Tool maker's microscope and its uses. T2

22

List Out the

Instruments for Flat

surface measurement

Optical flat. Flat surface measurement

Surface plate, knife edge and straight

edge.

T2

.

23

Demonstrate the

Working of Optical

projector

Optical projector and Auto collimeter. T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 52

24 Describe Flat surface

measurement . Flat surface measurement . T2

25

Distinguish Between

knife edge and straight

edge.

knife edge and straight edge. T2

26 Discuss Interferometer Interferometer and their uses. T2

27

Distinguish between

surface roughness and

surface Waviness

Differences between surface roughness

and surface Waviness

T2

28

Evaluate of surface

finish,

Evaluation of surface finish, CLA R.MS

and Rz values .

T2

29 Define Geometrical

irregularities. Geometrical irregularities. T2

30

Write Numerical

assessment of surface

finish.

Numerical assessment of surface finish. T2

31

List out Direct

instrument methods.

Direct instrument method. Stylus,

applications.

T2

32

Explain the working

principle of

Profilometer

Profilometer, Tarmlinson surface meter

.applications

T2

33

Explain the working

principle of Taylor-

Hobson talysurf.

Taylor-Hobson talysurf. . T2

34

Write the ISI symbol

for indication of

surface finish

ISI symbol for indication of surface finish T2

35 Identify the Different

Comparators

Introduction to comparators. T2

36

Classify the

Mechanical

Comparators

Comparators - Mechanical comparators,

applications and advantages

T2

37

Distinguish Between

Electrical and

Electronic

Electrical and Electronic Comparators, T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 53

Comparators applications and advantages.

38

Explain Pneumatic

comparators

Pneumatic comparators and their uses in

mass production

T2

39

State the Advantages

of Pneumatic

comparators over

Mechanical

comparators

Advantages of Pneumatic comparators

over Mechanical comparators

T2

40

Discuss the Screw

thread measurement

Introduction to screw thread

measurement.

T2

41 Identify the Errors in

screw thread

Errors in screw thread. T2

42

Explain the process of

Measurement of

effective diameter.

Measurement of effective diameter. T2

43

Demonstrate how

thread angle can be

measured

Angle of thread and thread pitch

measurement.

T2

44 Describe about Profile

thread gauges.

Profile thread gauges. T2

45 Discus the Process Of

Best size method.

Best size method. T2

46 Use of machine tool

Alignment Test

Requirements of machine tool Alignment

Test

T2

47

Describe how

Alignment test on

Lathe machine, Milling

machine can be done

Alignment test on Lathe machine,

Milling machine

T2

48

Explain the process

Alignment Test On

Drilling Machine

Alignment Test On Drilling Machine T2

49 Write the Preparation

of Acceptance Charts

Preparation of Acceptance Charts T2

50 Classify the Gear Gear measuring Instruments T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 54

measuring Instruments

51

Illustrate the Gear

Tooth profile

Measurement

Gear Tooth profile Measurement T2

52 Define Pitch Pressure

angle

Measurement of Diameter, Pitch Pressure

angle

T2

53

Discuss the process of

Measurement of tooth

thickness

Measurement of tooth thickness T2

54 Classify the types of

CMM

Types of CMM T2

55 Discuss the role of

CMM

Role of CMM

56 List out the

Applications of CMM

Applications of CMM

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 55

10.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Objectives

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1 H S S H H H S H

2 S S S

3 H S S S H S

4 H S H

5 H S H H H H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

10.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE

ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcomes

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1 S H S H H S H H

2 S H H H H S H H

3 S H S H H S H H

4 S S S S S S S S

5 S S S S S S S S

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 56

10.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

UNIT-1

1. Allowance in limits and fits refers to. [ B ]

a) Axiom clearance between shaft and hole b) Minimum clearance between shaft and

hole

c) Difference between maximum and minimum size of hole d) Difference between

maximum and

minimum size of shaft

2. The fit on a hole shaft system is specified as 117-s6. The type of fit is [

C ]

a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

3. The lower limit of shaft is greater than the upper limit of the hole, the fit is.

[ C ]

a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

4. In the specification of dimensions and fits [ C ]

a) Allowance is equal to the bilateral tolerance b) Allowance is equal to the unilateral

tolerance c) Allowance is independent of tolerance d) Allowance is equal to

the difference between Maximum and Minimum dimension specified by the tolerance.

5. When the clearance between the mating parts are zero, the fit is. [ A ]

a) Slide fit b) Easy Slide fit c) Running fit d) Loose running fit

6. When tolerance is varies only one side of the basic size is called [ B ]

a) Bilateral tolerance b) Unilateral tolerance c) Allowance d) Clearance

7. Prototype meter is made of [ B ]

a) Aluminum b) Platinum and Iridium alloy c) Titanium d) Steel

8. In tail stock which type of fit is used [ A ]

a) Slide fit b) Easy Slide fit c) Running fit d) Loose Running fit

9. What is defined as permissible variation in dimension of a part [ C ]

a) Allowance b) Clearance c) Tolerance d) Limit

10. The lower limit of shaft is greater than the upper limit of the hole, the fit is.

[ C ]

a) Clearance fit b) Transition fit c) Interference fit d) Wringing fit

11. International prototype meter is [ A ]

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 57

(a)100cm long (b)102cm long

(c) 38 inches long (d)1cm long

12. Metrology is a science [ B ]

(a) Instruments (b)measurement

(c) Length (d)angles

13. The algebraic difference between the result of measurement and true value of

the

Quantity [ B ]

(a) Limit (b) tolerance

(c) Error (d) clearance

14. Degree of repeatability of the measuring process [ C ]

(a)accuracy (b)limit

(c) Precession (d) magnification

15. Following are process of measurement [ D ]

(a)measurand (b)reference

(c) comparator (d)all the above

16. the standard size for the part and is the same for both the hole and its shaft. [ B

]

(a)Nominal Size (b)Basic Size

(c)Actual Size (d)all the above

17. Differential screw micro meter is used [ A ]

(a). To give direct indication of difference between two reading (b). For digital

readout

(c). To measure gap between grooves (d). For very high

degree of accuracy

18. Which of the following can be used to scribe lines parallel to the edges of a part

[ C ]

(a). Venire calipers (b). Screw gauge (c). Divider (d). Hermaphrodite

caliper

19. The permissible variation in dimension is called as

[ B ]

(a)tolerance (b)limit (c)fit (d)all the above

20.for shaft the relationship of deviation with tolerance is given by IT=

[ A ]

(a)es-ei (b)ES-EI (c)HL-LL (d)es+ei

UNIT-II

1. If a gauge is made as an exact copy of mating part of the component to be

checked, it [ B ]

a) Limit gauge b) Standard gauge c)Work shop gauge d) Inspection gauge

2. When using a micrometer a constant measuring pressure can be obtained by

using the [ B ]

a) Thimble b) Ratchet c) Spindle d)Roughness

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 58

3. Feeler gauge is used for [ B ]

a) Clearance in hole b) Clearance between two mating parts c)Clearance in shaft d)

none

4. Slip gauges are called [ C ]

a) Angle gauges b) feeler gauge c) Gauge blocks d) All the

above

5. Relief holes are provided to reduce the _______ of the sine bar. [ A ]

a) Weight b) Length c) Diameter d) Size

6. Telescopic gauge are used for [ B ]

a) External diameter of hole, slot and grooves b) Internal diameter of hole , slot and

grooves

c) Both A and B d) Any one of the Above

7. A sine bar is specified by

[ B ]

(a). Its total length (b). The centre distance between the two rollers

(c). The size of the rollers (d). The distance between rollers and

upper surface

8. The allowance recommended by B.S.I for wear on solid ring and plug gauge is

[ B ]

a) 0.1mm b) 0.005mm c) 0.5mm d) 0.05mm

9. Ring gauges are used for [ D ]

a) Measuring any dimension b) Checking shaft diameter

c) Checking bore diameter d) Measuring outside dimension

10. Which of the following can be used to scribe lines parallel to the edges of a part

[ C ]

a) Vernier callipers b) Screw gauge c) Divider d) Hermaphrodite caliper

11.Dial Indicators are used for [ A ]

(a)Thickness Measurement (b) Height Measurement

(c)Depth Measuremnt (d)Diameter Measurement

12. GO gauge checks the Maximum Material Condition (MMC)

13. NOT-GO gauge checks the Least Material Condition (LMC)

14. In unilateral system; the gauge tolerance zones lie entirely within the [ C ]

(a) Maximum Material Condition (b)Minimum Material Condition

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 59

(c)Tolerance Zone (d) All of the above

15. Limit Gauges Do not indicate the actual size of the component

16.The following type is not a gauge [ D ]

(a)Ring (b)Snap (c)Plug (d)Scale

17.Snap gauges are used for [ A ]

(a)External dimensions (b)Internal dimensions (c)Threads (d)Taper angle

18.A positional gauge is to check the ------------------------ [ C ]

(a)location (b)height (c)distance (d)length

19.bevel protractor is used to measure the [ A ]

(a)angle (b)straightness (c)flatness (d)parallelism

20.Spirit levels are used to [ D ]

(a)check the level (b)check the thread (c)check the height (d)check the depth

UNIT-III

1. Auto collimator is used to check [ C ] a)

Roughness b) Flatness c) Angle d) Automobile balance

2. A monochromatic light consists of rays of 5.9x10.7m wavelength.

3. Interference phenomenon can be observed with all type of wave sources of light.

4. The fitter gauge interferometer has Roster prism.

5. Optical flats are made of quartz or silica.

6. the phenomenon of interaction o light waves is called optical.

7. Light is a form of energy being propagated by electromagnetic radiation.

8. If the two rays of the same end points meet at some point, a mutual interference will

occur.

9. Electromagnetic radiation may be represented by Planks curve.

10. Type A optical flat has a single working surface.

11. The parallelism of the working surfaces of type B optical flats can be tested by Fizeau

Interferometer

method.

12. Optical flats are cylindrical in form with the working with [ A ]

(a)Surfaces Flat (b)Rough Surfaces (C) Smooth surfaces (d)all of the above

13. If the optical flat under test has a perfectly flat surface then the fringes observed will be

straight lines are [ B ]

(a)Perpendicular to each other (b)Parallel to each other

(c) Interfere with each other (d) All of the above

14. Interferometers are optical instruments used for measuring flatness and determining the

length of

slip gauges by direct reference to the wavelength of light.

15. This is the oldest type of interferometer [ A ]

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 60

(a) Michelson Interferometer (b) N.P.L. Flatness Interferometer

(c) Laser Interferometers (d)Talysurf Interfero meter

16.Beam splitters. These, (like partially silvered mirrors) divide the laser beam into separate

beams along different axes.

17. As the ACLI measures component travel in the direction of laser beam, and if two are

not coincident, then error called -----------will be introduced [ A ]

(a) Cosine error (b)Sine error (c)Parralax error (d)error

18. Beam must never be completely blocked by a solid object,

19. These are used to deflect the light beam around corners on its path from the laser to

each axis.[ B ]

(a)Beam Reflectors (b)Beam Benders (c)Beam Splitters (d)Interferometer

20. These are used for checking the straightness and flatness of parts in conjunction with

the surface plates

and spirit levels [ C ]

(a) Tool Maker’s Microscope (b)Angle Plate (c) V Block (d)optical flat

UNIT-IV

1. The surface irregularities of small wave length are called [ A ]

a) Primary texture b) Secondary texture c) Waviness d) Roughness

2. Secondary texture is also known as Surface waviness

3. Profilometer is measuring for Surface roughness in microns units

4. Surface Roughness value is 1.6 to 8μm then symbol for this ▼▼

5. The roughness is also known as [ A ] (a) primary texture (b) secondary texture (c) both A & B (d) none of the above

6. Surface texture includes. [ C ] (a) roughness (b) waviness

(c) roughness and waviness (d) none of the above

7. The symbol Ra 8.0(2.5) means surface roughness.

8. The waviness is also called as. [ B ]

(a) primary texture (b) secondary texture (c) both A & B (d) none of the above

9. Surface irregularities which occur at infrequent intervals is called Flaw.

10. Profile is defined as the contour of any section through a surface.

11.Lay refers to the predominant direction of the marks visible on the surface.

12.Tomlinson surface meter is a mechanical type equipment

13.Moving coil instrument is mounted above the -------------- [ A ]

(a)Stylus (b)coil (c) magnet (d)table

14. Surface flatness is measured by ---------------------- [ C ]

(a) Micrometer (b) feeler gauge (c) optical flat (d)dial indicator

15.the surface roughness/texture may be obtained by------------------ [ A ]

(a)any production method (b)without removal of material

(c) removal of material by machining (d)by any method

16.for the roughness grade number three, roughness grade symbol consists of -------

[ D ]

(a)four triangles (b)two triangles

(c) Three triangles (d)no triangle

17The roughness value for grade N2 is four.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 61

18.The roughness grade for 50m is 0.05microns

19. Roughness value Ra is given by microns units

20. M-System is a satisfactory means at the point of production

UNIT-V

1. The usual range of magnification obtained in mechanical comparators is [ A ]

a) 250 to 1000 b) 200 to 2000 c) 300 to 1000 d) 350 to 2000

2. -------------------------- comparators are based on the principle of frequency modulation.

[ C ]

a) Mechanical b) Electrical c) Electronic d) Pneumatic

3. The comparator is providing magnification in the range of 500 to 1000, then the

comparator is called as [

D ]

a) Optical b) Pneumatic c) Differential comparator d) Sigma

4. The Johansson mikrokator comparator is also called- Twisted strip

5. The pneumatic gauging is based on Bernoulli’s theory.

6. Optical type of comparator do not require any external agency such as electricity or

air.

7. In mechanical comparator the magnification of the small styles movement is

obtained by means of levers, gears , etc.

8. In reed type mechanical comparator, the gauging head is usually a sensitive , high

quality , dial indicator.

9. Dial indicator is a simplest type of mechanical comparator.

10.Electrical and Electronic comparators depend on their operation on A.C. wheat stone

bridge incorporating galvanometer.

11. If the pitch of the thread is uniform but is longer or shorter than that of its nominal

value the error is called [ B ]

a) Periodic error b) Progressive error c) Drunken error d) Erratic errors

12. In order to measure that all the measurements are made at the same pressure, an -------

indicator is used in measurement of major diameter. [ C ]

a) Dial indicator b) Micrometer indicator c) Fiducial indicator d) Comparator

13. Errors in the flank angle causes a virtual increase in the -------------------- diameter of

a bolt

and a decrease in that of a nut. [ D ]

a) Major Diameter b) Minor diameter c) Virtual diameter d) Effective diameter

14. Diameter of Best size wire is equal to (db) = (p/2) sec x

15. Three wire method can be used to measure Pitch

16. Flank angle is equal to 1-2 times the thread angle.

17. Pitch errors in the thread are classified as root, flank, flank angle,1/2 angle.

18. Thread micrometer can measure pitch of the thread.

19. The angle of ISO metric thread is 600

20. If P is the pitch of the thread the best size wire is equal to pitch dia.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 62

10.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS

OBJECTIVES: This course provides a basic understanding of the wide range of activities encompassed

by personnel working in standards and calibration laboratories. It covers the measurement

process, types and correct use of measurement and test equipment, and measurement

standards. It provides an opportunity for students to learn about measurement uncertainty

and risk analysis. The course includes the procedures necessary to set up and to have

knowledge on calibration.

TUTORIAL 1

LIMITS AND FITS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1. Draw a sketch and explain minimum and maximum

metal conditions of shaft and hole. Knowledge

2

2. Discuss complete classification of fits. Explain them

with the help of suitable examples. comprehension

2

3. List out the types of assemblies. Knowledge 3

4. Illustrate the need of limit system Application 2

5. Determine about allowance and Tolerance Evaluation 2

6. Define MML Knowledge 1

7. How is a fundamental tolerance represented. Knowledge 1

8. Define limit Knowledge 1

9. What are the two systems of writing tolerance . Knowledge 2

10. What are the types of assemblies. Knowledge 2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 63

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Explain about the types of assemblies comprehension

2

2 Interpret the meaning of following type of fit :

(i) H7f6 (ii) H7v5 (iii) H7r6 (iv) H7h6 Knowledge

2

3. Explain unilateral and bilateral tolerance system with

a neat diagram comprehension

2

4. Describe the term normal size, deviation, upper

deviation and lower deviation. Remember 1

5.

A 50mm diameter shaft to made to rotate in a bush.

The tolerance for both shaft and bush are 0.05mm.

Determine the dimension of shaft and bush to give a

maximum clearance of 0.075mm with the hole basis

system.

Evaluation 2

6.

In a hole and shaft assembly of 30mm nominal size

the tolerance for hole and shaft are as specified

below: Hole having upper limit as +0.02 and lower

limit as -0.00mm Shaft having upper limit as –

0.04mm and lower limit as – 0.07mm: Determine (i)

maximum and minimum clearance obtained (ii)

allowance (iii) hole and shaft tolerance (iv) MML of

shaft and hole (v) type of fit.

Evaluation 2

7.

A hole and a mating shaft are to have a nominal size

assembly size of 40mm. the assembly is to have maximum

clearance of 0.15mm and minimum clearance of 0.05mm.

The hole tolerance is 1.5 times the shaft tolerance. Determine

the limits for both hole and shaft by using hole basis and

shaft basis system.

Evaluation 2

8.

Between two mating parts of 100mm basic size the actual

interference fit is to from 0.05 and 0.12mm. The tolerance

for hole is the same as the tolerance of shaft. Find the size of

oth the shaft and the hole (a) hole basis unilateral system (b)

shaft basis unilateral system.

Evaluation

2

9. Draw a conventional diagram of limits and fits and

explainall the terms involved in it

10. Explain how hole, shaft and fit are designed? explain

withsuitable example

comprehension

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 64

UNIT II

LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Explain the working mechanism of a dial indicator

with neat diagram.

Comprehension

2

2. State the principle of the spirit level.

Knowledge

1

3. Show weather the new taper of a plug gauge is

measured using sine bar. Application

2

4. Explain the principle of a sine bar. Comprehension 2

5. Examine the working mechanism of a dial indicator

with neat diagram. Analysis

3

6. How is length specified in a sine bar Knowledge 1

7. Why is a plug gauge used Knowledge 1

8. Slip gauges are also called as what Knowledge

2

9. What is meant by wringing in slip gauges Knowledge

2

10. What is the use of a telescope gauge. Knowledge

2

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

A hole and shaft system had the following dimension

60 H8/c8. The multiplier of grade 8 is 25. The

fundamental deviation for “c” shaft is –(9.5+.08D).

the diameter step is 50-80. Design the suitable “GO”

and “NO-GO” gauge for shaft and hole..

Evaluation

2

2.

Design the general type GO and NOGO gauge for a

component having 25H7/f8 fit. Fundamental

deviation of “f” shaft=-5.5D0.41 25mm falls in the

diameter step of 18 and 30. Take wear allowance of

8% of the gauge tolerance and determine (a) types of

fit (b) allowance

Evaluation

2

3. A 100mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 330

determine the sip gauge needed from 87 pieces set. Evaluation

2

4. How is an angle of 330-9’-15” is to be measured with

the help of the following standard gauges ? Analysis 1

5. Explain the types of snap gauge with diagram. comprehension

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 65

6. Give the complete classification of taper gauges with

the help of neat diagram. Remember 1

7. What is wringing? What precautions must take while

wringing slip gauges? Knowledge

2

8.

How do you measure external dovetail, internal

dovetail and angle of dovetail with the help of

precision balls and rollers.

Analysis 1

9. Explain the construction and working of an optical

bevel protractor with neat diagram comprehension

2

10. Explain in detail about plug gauge and snap gauge comprehension

2

UNIT III

OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND FLAT SURFACE

MEASUREMENTS

SHORT ANSWERS

1. What is an optical flat? Knowledge

2

2. Explain the procedure for flatness measurement on

surface plate.

comprehension

2

3. Determine the principle of an autocollimator with

neat diagram

Evaluation

2

4.

Illustrste some applications of a Tool marker’s

microscope.

Application

4

5. What is the principal of autocollimeter Knowledge

2

6. Draw a line diagram of NPL interferometer Remember 1

7. List out some applications of a Tool marker’s

microscope Remember 1

8. Draw a neat diagram how an auto collimator is

represented

9. What material is used for optical flats Knowledge

2

10. Explain the use of type A optical flat comprehension

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 66

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Explain with neat diagram an optical flat comprehension

2

2. Which prism is used in fitter gauge interferometer

explain?

3. Explain the flat surface measurements. comprehension

2

4. What is the use of a surface plate explain? Knowledge

2

5. Describe in detain the working of an Knife Edge. Remember 1

6. With a neat diagram illustrate an autocollimeter and

its working principal.

7. Explain the NPL interferometer construction. comprehension

2

8. Describe the importance of an optical projector. Remember 1

9. List out the different optical instruments and explain

them. Remember 1

10. What are the applications and advantages of an

optical projector.

Knowledge

2

UNIT IV

SURFACE ROUGHNESS MEASUREMENT

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. What is the ISI symbol for indication of surface

finish? Knowledge

1

2. Define waviness Knowledge

1

3. What are the methods used for evaluating the surface

finish? Knowledge

2

4.

How will you represent it , The surface finish on the milled

surface is not to exceed 5micro meter Ra with a cutoff

length 2mm machining allowance 0.5mm and direction of

lay parallel.

Analysis 1

5. Define the Term Primary Texture Knowledge

1

6. What are the different types of Lay. Knowledge

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 67

7. What is Form Factor Knowledge

2

8. Explain the Principle of Profilometer. comprehension

2

9. How CLA index number is determined? Knowledge

1

10. Draw the Diagram of Surface Texture showing all

the elements Remember 1

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Determine CLA & RMS values, the measurement of

surface roughness heights of successive 10 peaks and

troughs were measured from a datum and were

22,30,45,56,15,55,35,40 microns. If these

measurement were obtained on 15mm length

Evaluation

2

2. Explain the working and usage of Talysurf in surface

roughness measurement.

comprehension

2

3. Explain the method of measurement of surface finish

using profilograph with neat diagram.

comprehension

2

4. Explain the working of Tomlinson Surface Meter

with neat diagram.

comprehension

2

5. 10. Explain the following terms?

i. Roughness ii. Waviness iii. lay.

comprehension

2

6.

Explain the roughness indices terms Ra or CLA, Rz

and RMS values in numerical assessment of

roughness.

comprehension

2

7.

Determine CLA & RMS values, In the measurement

of surface roughness heights of successive 10 peaks

and troughs were measured from a datum and were

33,25,30,19,22,18,27,29,20 microns. If these

measurement were obtained on 10mm length

Evaluation

2

8. Explain the construction and working of a

profilograph for surface roughness measurement.

comprehension

2

9. Explain the working of profilometer with neat

diagram. comprehension 2

10.

The heights of peak and valleys of 22 Successive

points on a surface are 32, 28, 41, 24, 35, 19, 31, 21,

40, 18, 44, 24, 41, 25, 40, 26,35,18, 40, 18, 39, 21

microns respectively, measured over a length of

20mm. Determine CLA and RMS values of

roughness surface?

Evaluation

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 68

UNIT V

SCREW THREAD MEASUREMENT AND MEASUREMENT THROUGH

COMPARATORS AND GEAR MEASUREMENT AND MACHINE TOOL

ALIGNMENT TESTS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of sigma

comparator.

comprehension

1

2. What is CMM? Knowledge 4

3. Write the types of coordinate measuring machines comprehension

2

4. List out s list out the advantages and disadvantages of pneumatic

comparat Remember 1

5. Define Periodic error Knowledge

1

6. State the advantages of mechanical comparator Knowledge

1

7. Define the term Runout Knowledge

1

8. Mention the application of CMM. Remember 1

9. List the various geometrical checks made on machine

tools Remember 1

10. What are the characteristics expected for a

comparator

Knowledge

2

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

What is meant by best size wire? Derive the

expression for the same in terms of the pitch and

angle of the thread? Explain the terms involved in the

expression?

Knowledge

2

2. Explain about pneumatic comparator and their uses

in mass production with neat diagram? comprehension

2

3. Describe Briefly coordinate measuring machine

(CMM). Remember 1

4. What is meant by Alignment Test On machine Tool?

Why they are necessary? Explain Knowledge

2

5. Describe with neat sketches three-wire method of

measuring the effective diameter of a screw thread? Remember 1

6. What is gear pitch? Describe any method of

measuring gear pitch Knowledge

2

8. List the different elements required to be measured in

order to determine the accuracy of screw thread Remember 1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 69

9. With the help of a neat sketch explain the

construction of reed type of comparator? comprehension

2

10.

Describe with neat sketches two-wire method of

measuring the effective diameter of a screw thread? Remember 1

10.13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

ASSIGNMENT- I

LIMTS AND FITS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1. How is a fundamental tolerance represented. Knowledge 1

2 What are the two systems of writing tolerance . Comprehension 1

3 List out the suitable examples of clearance fit.

Knowledge

1

4 Calculate the upper and lower limit of 25 +0.05 +0.00 Evaluate 2

5 Draw a neat diagram representing tolerance . Knowledge 1

6 Draw a conventional diagram of limits and fits. Knowled 1

7 Differentiate between tolerance and allowance. Analysis 1

8 Define a)allowance b) Tolerance Knowledge 1

9 What are the types of assemblies. Comprehension 1

10 How is a fundamental deviation represented. Knowledge 1

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Differentiate between Hole basis and shaft basis

system with diagram. Comprehension

2

2.

State the principle features of international

standard systems of limits and fits. Knowledge

2

3.

Give the complete classification of fits. Explain

them with the help of suitable examples. Application

3

4.

Explain about the types of assemblies.

Comprehension

2

5. Determine about the tolerance system with neat Evaluation 2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 70

diagram.

6.

With the help of suitable diagram explain

minimum and maximum metal conditions of shaft

and hole.

Knowledge

1

7.

Examine the need of limit system.

Application

2

8.

Define allowance and Tolerance.

Knowledge

1

9

A 50mm diameter shaft to made to rotate in a

bush. The tolerance for both shaft and bush are

0.05mm. Determine the dimension of shaft and

bush to give a maximum clearance of 0.075mm

with the hole basis syatem.

Evaluation 2

10 Explain the difference between interference and

selective assembly. Comprehension

2

ASSIGNMENT- II

LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1 List out the types of gauges.

Knowledge

1

2 Define Taylor’s principle of gauge design.

Knowledge

1

3

List out the two standard systems of linear

measurement.

Knowledge

1

4 Explain the use of a telescope gauge.

Comprehension

2

5 What is the use of a relief holes in a sine bar.

Knowledge

4

6 Define line standard and end standard.

Knowledge

1

7 What are the different grades of slip gauges.

Knowledge

4

8 Explain the principle does a Sine bar work.

Comprehension

2

9 What is meant by wringing in slip gauges.

Knowledge

4

10 Explain the use of feeler gauge.

Comprehension

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 71

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Explain the construction and working of an optical

bevel protractor with neat diagram.

Comprehension

2

2. Describe new taper of a plug gauge is measured

using sine bar.

Comprehension

2

3. Give the complete classification of taper gauges

with the help of neat diagram.

Application

3

4. What are the different grades of slip gauges?

Explain?

Knowledge

1

5. Determine the working mechanism of a dial

indicator with neat diagram.

Evaluation

2

6.

Describe the principle of the spirit level.

Knowledge

2

7.

Explain the Taylor’s principle of gauge design.

Comprehension

2

8.

Explain the principle of a sine bar

Analyze

4

9

A hole and shaft system had the following

dimension 60 H8/c8. The multiplier of grade 8 is

25. The fundamental deviation for “c” shaft is –

(9.5+.08D). the diameter step is 50-80. Design the

suitable “GO” and “NO-GO” gauge for shaft and

hole..

Evaluation 1

10 Explain the manufacturing method for slip gauges

and how they calibrate?

Comprehension

2

ASSIGNMENT-3

OPTICAL MESURING INSTRUMENTS

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1. What is the principle of an auto collimator. Knowledge

4

2 Define optical. Knowledge

1

3 Which prism is used in fitter gauge interferometer . Knowledge

4

4 List out some applications of a Tool marker’s

microscope.

Knowledge

1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 72

5 Draw a line diagram of NPL interferometer. Knowledge

1

6 Explain the use of type A optical flat Comprehension

2

7 What is the use of a tool maker’s microscope. Knowledge

4

8 Draw a neat diagram how an auto collimator is

represented.

Knowledge

1

9 Explain the use of an optical projector. Comprehension

2

10 What material is used for optical flats. Knowledge

4

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Explain the formation of interference fringes when

light falls on an optical flat resting on a lapped

surface.

Comprehension

2

2.

What is a straight edge? Explain how it can be used

to measure the straightness?

Knowledge

1

3.

Explain the procedure for flatness measurement on

surface plate.

Comprehension

2

4.

Explain about the NPL flatness interferometer.

Analyze

4

5.

What is an optical flat? Explain with neat diagram?

Knowledge

1

6.

Explain about the optical projector with neat figure.

Analyze

4

7.

Explain the principle of an autocollimator with neat

diagram.

Comprehension

2

8.

List out some applications of a Tool marker’s microscope.

Knowledge

1

9.

Explain the formation of interference fringes when

light falls on an optical flat resting on a curved

surface.

Comprehension

2

10. Explain how Auto Collimator can be used to measure

Flateness

Analyze

4

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 73

ASSIGNMENT-IV

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S. No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

1. Define fullness and emptiness in form factor. Knowledge

1

2 What are the methods used for evaluating the

surface finish?

Knowledge

1

3

How will you represent it , The surface finish on

the milled surface is not to exceed 5micro meter Ra

with a cutoff length 2mm machining allowance

0.5mm and direction of lay parallel..

Evaluation

1

4 Explain the Term Primary Texture. Comprehension

2

5 Sketch The Conventional representation of Surface

Roughness Evaluation

6 Explain the Principle of Profilometer. Comprehension

2

7 Define the Term Secondary Texture. Knowledge

1

8 How CLA index number is determined? Knowledge

1

9 What are the stylus probe instruments? Knowledge

4

10 What is Form Factor Knowledge

4

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1.

Explain about the Taylor-Hobson ‘Talysurf’ with

neat diagram. Comprehension

2

2.

Explain the method of measurement of surface

finish using profilograph with neat diagram. Comprehension

2

3.

Define the following terms with neat diagram.

(a) Roughness (b) Waviness (c) Lay and its

different types

Knowledge 1

4.

Make a comparative study of CLA, RMS and ten

point height method of measurement of surface

finish with the help of an example. Explain the

difference.

Comprehension 2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 74

5.

In the measurement of surface roughness heights of

successive 10 peaks and troughs were measured

from a datum and were 22,30,45,56,15,55,35,40

microns. If these measurement were obtained on

15mm length. Determine CLA & RMS values.

Analyze

4

6.

In the measurement of surface roughness heights of

successive 10 peaks and troughs were measured

from a datum and were 33,25,30,19,22,18,27,29,20

microns. If these measurement were obtained on

10mm length. Determine CLA & RMS values.

Analyze

4

7.

The surface finish on the milled surface is not to

exceed 5micro meter Ra with a cutoff length 2mm

machining allowance 0.5mm and direction of lay

parallel. How will you represent it .

Analyze

4

8.

What is the ISI symbol for indication of surface finish

Knowledge

1

9 State the Reasons for Controlling Surface Texture. Knowledge 1

10 Differentiate between Primary Texture and Secondary

Texture. Comprehension

2

ASSIGNMENT- V

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS

S.

No QUESTION

Blooms

Taxonomy Level

Course

Outcome

1 Classify the comparator according to the principles

used for obtaining magnification. Application 2

2 List out the types of coordinate measuring machines Knowledge 1

3 List out the Different types of Mechanical

Comparators. Knowledge

1

4 Mention the application of CMM. Application 2

5 What do you mean by alignment test on machine

tools? Knowledge

1

6 List the various geometrical checks made on

machine tools. Knowledge

1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 75

7 Describe the characteristics expected for a

comparator. Knowledge

1

8 Explain the effect of flank angle error? Comprehension 2

9 Discuss about best size of wire? Knowledge 1

10 Define Drunken Error Knowledge 1

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS

1. Explain about the reed type mechanical comparator

with neat diagram?

Comprehension

2

2. Explain about pneumatic comparator and their uses

in mass production with neat diagram? Comprehension

2

3.

Explain about sigma comparator with a neat

diagram? Comprehension

2

4.

Illustrate about the electrical and electronic

comparator with neat diagram Application

2

5. List the different elements required to be measured

in order to determine the accuracy of screw thread Knowledge

1

6.

List out some of the screw tread terminology with

neat diagram? Knowledge

1

7.

Determine the Flank angle of a screw thread? Evaluation

1

8.

What is meant by best size wire? Derive the

expression for the same in terms of the pitch and

angle of the thread? Explain the terms involved in

the expression?

Comprehension

2

9 Explain the measurement technique for pitch

pressure angle of a gear. Comprehension

2

10 How do you measure the thickness of the tooth of a

gear? Explain. Comprehension

2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 76

11.0 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY (A55012)

11.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A55012

Course Title DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

5 1 - 4

Course Coordinator G.AnandaRao, Associate Professor

Team of Instructors S.Navya Sree, Assistant Professor, M V BABU, Assistant Professor

COURSE OVERVIEW:

This course expands on the mechanical engineering student’s background in dynamic

synthesis and analysis by providing significant skills and experience in creating and

modeling mechanisms. This course is intended to deal with the forces and their effects,

while acting upon the machine parts in motion. The knowledge of this subject is very

essential for an engineer in designing the various parts of a machine. Study of applications

of gyroscopes is very helpful to learn the precession and its effect on automobiles. The

study of dynamics of machinery is an applied field of mechanical engineering that is

concerned with understanding the relationship between the geometry and the motions of

the parts of a machine and the forces that produce this motion. This course helps to learn

how to analyze the motions of mechanisms, design mechanisms to have given motions, and

analyze forces in machines. Application of vibrations to the analysis and design of

machines and mechanical components.

11.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4 Engineering Mechanics, Kinematics

of Machinery

11.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each

75 100

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 77

question carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination

shall be conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5

units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid.

The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average

of the two midterm examinations shall be taken as the

final marks secured by each candidate.

11.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2

MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The objectives of the course are to enable the student to have:

1. An ability to derive frictional forces on bodies in motion by applying knowledge of

mathematics and mechanics.

2. An ability to design and conduct experiments on gyroscopes, as well as to analyze and

interpret data.

3. An ability to design, formulate, and solve engineering problems on clutches and brakes

4. An ability to understand the purpose of dynamometers and find the power of an engine

5. An ability to balance both the rotating and reciprocating masses .

6. An ability to study the vibrations of beams and springs when masses are attached

7. To enhance the ability of students to work in teams, establish the leadership role.

8. The broad education necessary to understand the impact of engineering solutions in a

global, economic, environmental, and societal context.

9. A recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in life-long learning.

10. An ability to use the techniques, skills, and modern engineering tools necessary for

engineering practice.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 78

12.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

After completing this course the student must demonstrate the knowledge and ability to:

1. Analyze Dynamics of the three-dimensional particle motion in various coordinate

systems Cartesian, natural and cylindrical.

2. Ability to learn the concepts of gyroscopic effects and effect of precision motion on the

stability of moving vehicles.

3. Ability to learn the concepts of static and dynamic force analysis of planar

mechanisms.

4. Understanding of the concepts of friction-clutches, brakes and dynamometers and its

importance.

5. Understanding the importance of turning moment diagrams, fly wheels and governors

its analysis.

6. Ability to understand concepts of various balancing of rotary and reciprocating mass.

7. Understanding of the concepts of vibrations and simple problems on forced damped

vibrations.

8. Able to communicate effectively in both verbal and written form.

9. Understanding of impact of engineering solutions on the society and also will be aware

of contemporary issues.

10. Develop confidence for self education and ability for life-long learning.

11. Can participate and succeed in competitive examinations like GATE, GRE.

11.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing,

mathematical foundations, algorithmic principles, and

computer science and engineering theory in the

modeling and design of computer-based systems to real-

world problems (fundamental engineering analysis

skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

b

An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as

to analyze and interpret data (information retrieval

skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

c

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a

computer-based system, process, component, or

program to meet desired needs, within realistic

constraints such as economic, environmental, social,

political, health and safety, manufacturability, and

sustainability (Creative Skills)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary

teams (team work) N --

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 79

e

An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and

use the appropriate computing and engineering

requirements for obtaining its solution (engineering

problem solving skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

f

An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security

and social

issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)

N --

g

An ability to communicate effectively both in writing

and orally

(speaking / writing skills)

N --

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and

global impact of computing and engineering solutions

on individuals, organizations, and society (engineering

impact assessment skills)

N --

i

Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

continuing

professional development and life-long learning

(continuing

education awareness)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

j A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social

awareness) N --

k

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools

necessary for

computing and engineering practice (practical

engineering analysis

skills)

N --

l

An ability to apply design and development principles

in the construction of software and hardware systems of

varying complexity (software hardware interface)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional

development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face

competitive examinations that offer challenging and

rewarding careers in computing (successful career and

immediate employment).

N --

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

11.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS

UNIT – I

ANGULAR MOTION: Gyroscopes, effect of precession motion on the stability of

moving vehicles such as motor car, motor cycle, aero planes and ships. Static and

Dynamic force analysis of Planar Mechanisms.

UNIT – II

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 80

FRICTION: Inclined plane, friction of screw and nuts, pivot and collar, uniform pressure,

uniform wear, friction circle and friction axis: lubricated surfaces, boundary friction and

film lubrication.

CLUTCHES: Single plate, Multi plate, Cone Clutch, Centrifugal Clutch.

BRAKES AND DYNAMOMETERS: Simple block brakes, internal expanding brake,

band brake of vehicle.

Dynamometers, absorption and transmission types. General description and methods of

operations.

UNIT - III

TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM AND FLY WHEELS: Turning moment, Inertia

Torque connecting rod angular velocity and acceleration, crank effort and torque

diagrams, Fluctuation of energy, Fly wheels and their design.

GOVERNERS: Watt, Porter and Proell governors. Spring loaded governors – Hartnell

and hartung with auxiliary

springs. Sensitiveness, isochronism and hunting, Effort and power of the governors.

UNIT - IV

BALANCING: Balancing of rotating masses- Primary, Secondary, and higher balancing

of reciprocating masses. Analytical and graphical methods. Unbalanced forces and

couples.Examination of “V” and multi cylinder inline and radial engines for primary and

secondary balancing- Locomotive balancing - Hammer blow, Swaying couple, variation

of tractive efforts.

UNIT - V

VIBRATION: Free Vibration of mass attached to vertical spring, oscillation of

pendulums,Transverse loads, vibrations of beams with concentrated and distributed loads,

Dunkerly’s methods, Raleigh’s method, whirling of shafts, critical speeds, torsional

vibrations-one, two and three rotor systems.

Text Books:

T1. S. S. Ratan , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi,

India.

T2. Theory of mechanisms and machines/ Jagdish Lal/ Metropolitan Book Company.

Reference Books:

R1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dugggipati , Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers,

New Delhi, India.

R2. Shigley , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi,

India.

R3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of machines, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.

R4. R.K.Bansal, Theory of machines, Lakshmi publications, New Delhi, India.

R5. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Pearson 3rd edition.

R6. Ashok G Ambedkar, Mechanisms and Machines Theory, PHI/Eastern Economy

Edition.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 81

11.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning

Outcomes.

Lectur

e No.

Learning Objective

Topics to be covered Reference

L1 To understand the concept of

Gyroscopes and precession motion

PRECESSION :

Introduction T1&R1

L2 To understand the concept of

Gyroscopes

Gyroscopic couple

derivation, Types of

Gyroscopes

T1&R1

L3 To calculate the effect of gyro

couple on spinning bodies

Gyroscopic effect on

spinning bodies problems T1&R1

L4 To understand the effect of gyro

couple on Aeroplanes and find the

reaction forces

Gyroscopic effect on

Aeroplanes T1&R1

L5 To understand the effect of gyro

couple on Ships and find the

reaction forces

Gyroscopic effect on

stabilization of ships T1&R1

L6

To understand the effect of gyro

couple on Automobiles (four

wheeler) and find the reaction

forces

Gyroscopic couple effect

onAutomobiles, stabilization

of automobiles ( four

wheeler )

T1&R1

L7

To understand the effect of gyro

couple on Automobiles (two

wheeler) and find the reaction

forces

Gyroscopic effect on

stabilization of two wheeler. T1&R1

L8 To analyze static and dynamic

forces on various mechanisms and

draw free body diagrams

STATIC & DYNAMIC

FORCE ANALYSIS OF

MECHANISMS:

Introduction. Conditions for

Equilibrium, Free Body

Diagram

T1&R1

L9 To analyze different forces on two,

three force members

Two, Three Force members

analysis, problems. T1&R1

L10 To analyze static forces on slider

crank mechanisms

Static Analysis of Slider

Crank Mechanism

(Analytical & Graphical

method) problems

T1&R1

L11 To analyze static forces on four

bar mechanisms

Static Analysis of Four Bar

Mechanism (Analytical &

Graphical methods )

problems

T1&R1

L12 To analyze dynamic forces

onSlider Crankmechanisms

Dynamic analysis of Slider

Crank Mechanism T1&R1

L13 To analyze dynamic forces on

Four bar mechanism

Dynamic Analysis of Four

bar mechanism T1&R1

L14 To find the frictional force on the

body resting on horizontal and

inclined planes

FRICTION: Inclined plane T1&R4

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 82

L15 To understand the principal of

screw and nut friction of screw and nuts T1&R4

L16 Application of frictional forces to

solve the problems

pivot and collar, uniform

pressure, uniform wear T1&R4

L17 To understand the frictional force

on journal bearings

friction circle and friction

axis T1&R4

L18 To understand the frictional force

on Lubricatedsurfaces and solve

problems on them

Lubricatedsurfaces,

boundary friction and film

lubrication T1&R4

L19 To learn the principle of

clutches,brakes and dynamometer

CLUTCHES, BRAKES

and DYNAMOMETERS:

Introduction T1&R4

L20

To learn the principle of single

plate clutch and its working with

distribution of forces and solve

problems on them

Clutches: Single plate and

multi plate clutches

derivation, Problems T1&R4

L21

To learn the principle of cone

clutch and its working with

distribution of forces and solve

problems on them

Cone clutch derivations,

Problems T1&R4

L22 To learn the principle of

Centrifugal clutch and its working

with distribution of forces

Centrifugal clutch T1&R4

L23

To apply mathematical principles

for resolving frictional forces in

brakes and analyse different types

of brakes

BRAKES AND

DYNAMOMETERS:

Introduction T1&R4

L24 To understand the principle of

simple block brakes and study the

various forces acting on it

Simple Block Brakes T1&R4

L25

To understand the principle of

internal expanding shoe brakes and

study the various forces acting on

it

Internal expanding shoe

brakes. T1&R4

L26 To analyze the forces acting on the

band and block brakes

Band brakes, Band & block

brakes of the vehicle T1&R4

L27

To understand the working of

various dynamometers and to

understand different methods to

determine the power of a machine

Dynamometers: Absorption

& Transmission types T1&R4

L28 To understand the function of the

flywheel and analyze different

forces acting on the connecting rod

TURNING MOMENT

DIAGRAM AND FLY

WHEELS: Introduction,

turning moment –

connecting rod angular

velocity and acceleration,

T2&R5

L29 To plot graph between crank

effortand crank angle.

Crank effort and torque

diagrams T2&R5

L30 To understand the Fluctuation of Fluctuation of energy T2&R5

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 83

energy in the flywheel and solve

problems on them

L31 Procedure to design Flywheel Flywheels and their design T2&R5

L32 To understand the working of

Governors and analyze the forces GOVERNORS:

Introduction, Watt Governor T2&R5

L33 To understand the working and

analyze the forces of Porter and

Proell Governors

Porter and Proell Governors T2&R5

L34 To analyze the forces of acting on

Spring loaded governors and solve

problems on them

Spring loaded governors –

Hartnell and hartung with

auxiliary springs T2&R5

L35 To understand the properties of

governors

Sensitiveness, Isochronism

& hunting T2&R5

L36 To analyze and calculate the Effort

& Power of the governors

Effort & Power of the

governors T2&R5

L37 To analyze the forces and to

balance the forces on the crank

shaft

BALANCING OF

ROTATING &

RECIPROCATING

MASSES : Balancing of

rotating masses

T1&R4

L38 To analyze the forces and to

balance the masses on

reciprocating masses.

Primary, Secondary, and

higher balancing of

reciprocating masses-

Analytical and graphical

methods

T1&R4

L39

To analyze the forces and couples

to balance the masses on

reciprocating masses and examine

the unbalanced forces in radial

and v-engines

Unbalanced forces and

Couples, Examination of

‘V’ and multi-cylinder in-

line engines and radial

engines for primary and

secondary balancing

T1&R4

L40 To understand the balancing in

locomotives and analyze the forces

in reciprocating masses.

Locomotive balancing-

Hammer blow, Swaying

couple and Variation of

Tractive efforts

T1&R4

L41 To learn the concept of masses and

their vibrations in different bodies.

VIBRATIONS :Free

Vibrations of mass attached

to vertical spring Oscillation

of Pendulums

T2&R4

L42 To derive the frequency of

oscillating and transverse loads

Oscillation of Pendulums

,Transverse loads T2&R4

L43 To apply mathematical methods to

know the vibrations

Vibrations of beams with

concentrated and distributed

loads, Dunkerley’s method,

Rayleigh’s method.

T2&R4

L44 To analyze the whirling concept of

shafts at critical speeds

Whirling of shafts, critical

speeds T2&R4

L45 To derive the frequency for

torsional bodies

Torsional Vibrations - One

Two & Three rotor systems T2&R4

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 84

T1. S. S. Ratan , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw- Hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi,

India.

T2. Theory of mechanisms and machines/ Jagdish Lal/ Metropolitan Book Company.

R1. J. S. Rao, R. V. Dugggipati , Mechanism and Machine Theory, New Age Publishers,

New Delhi, India.

R2. Shigley , Theory of Machines, Tata McGraw hill education (P) Ltd, New Delhi,

India.

R3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of machines, CBS Publishers, New Delhi, India.

R4. R.K.Bansal, Theory of machines, Lakshmi publications, New Delhi, India.

R5. Sadhu Singh, Theory of Machines, Pearson 3rd edition.

R6. Ashok G Ambedkar, Mechanisms and Machines Theory, PHI/Eastern Economy

Edition.

11.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

Course

Programme

Outcomes

Objectives

A B C D E

F G

H I J K L M

I H S S S S S S

II S H H S S S S H S

III S H H S H S S S

IV S H S S S

V S H H S S S S H S

VI S H S S S

VII S H H S

VIII S H H S H

IX H S H H

X H H S H

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 85

11.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Programme

Outcomes

Outcomes

A B C D E

F G H

I J K L M

a H S S S S S S

b S S S S H S

c H S S S S S

d S S S H S S S

e S H S S S

f S H S S S S

g S S S S S H S

h S S H H S

i H H

j S H S S

k S H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 86

11.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I 1. A disc is spinning with an angular velocity ω rad/s about the axis of spin. The couple

applied to the disc causing precession will be [ d ]

where I = Mass moment of inertia of the disc, and

ωp = Angular velocity of precession of the axis of spin.

2. A disc spinning on its axis at 20 rad/s will undergo precession when a torque 100 N-m

is applied about an axis normal to it at an angular speed, if mass moment of inertia of

the disc is the 1 kg-m2 [ b ]

(a) 2 rad/s

(b) 5 rad/s

(c) 10 rad/s

(d) 20 rad/s

3. The engine of an aeroplane rotates in clockwise direction when seen from the tail end

and the aeroplane takes a turn to the left. The effect of the gyroscopic couple on the

aeroplane will be [ a ]

(a) to raise the nose and dip the tail (b) to dip the nose and raise the tail

(c) to raise the nose and tail (d) to dip the nose and tail

4. The air screw of an aeroplane is rotating clockwise when looking from the front. If it

makes a left turn, the gyroscopic effect will [ b ]

(a) tend to depress the nose and raise the tail b) tend to raise the nose and depress the

tail

(c) tilt the aeroplane (d) none of the above

5. The rotor of a ship rotates in clockwise direction when viewed from the stern and the

ship takes a left turn. The effect of the gyroscopic couple acting on it will be [ c ]

(a) to raise the bow and stern (b) to lower the bow and stern

(c) to raise the bow and lower the stern (d) to lower the bow and raise the stern

6. When the pitching of a ship is upward, the effect of gyroscopic couple acting on it will

be [ b ]

(a) to move the ship towards port side (b) to move the ship towards star-board

(c) to raise the bow and lower the stern (d) to raise the stern and lower the bow

7. In an automobile, if the vehicle makes a left turn, the gyroscopic torque [ a ]

(a) increases the forces on the outer wheels (b) decreases the forces on the outer wheels

(c) does not affect the forces on the outer wheels (d) none of the above

8. A motor car moving at a certain speed takes a left turn in a curved path. If the engine

rotates in the same direction as that of wheels, then due to the centrifugal forces [ b ]

(a) the reaction on the inner wheels increases and on the outer wheels decreases

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 87

(b) the reaction on the outer wheels increases and on the inner wheels decreases

(c) the reaction on the front wheels increases and on the rear wheels decreases

(d) the reaction on the rear wheels increases and on the front wheels decreases

9. When the crank is at the inner dead centre, in a horizontal reciprocating steam engine,

then the velocity of the piston will be [ a ]

(a) zero (b) minimum (c) maximum (d) None

10. The acceleration of the piston in a reciprocating steam engine is given by [d ]

Where ω = Angular velocity of the crank,

r = Radius of the crank,

θ = Angle turned by the crank from inner dead centre, and

n = Ratio of length of connecting rod to crank radius.

11. A rigid body, under the action of external forces, can be replaced by two masses

placed at a fixed distance apart. The two masses form an equivalent dynamical

system, if [ d ]

(a) The sum of two masses is equal to the total mass of the body

(b) The centre of gravity of the two masses coincides with that of the body

(c) The sum of mass moment of inertia of the masses about their centre of gravity is equal

to the mass moment of inertia of the body

(d) all of the above

12. The essential condition of placing the two masses, so that the system becomes

dynamically equivalent is [ a ]

(a) l1 .l2 = kG2 (b) l1 .l2 = kG

2 (c) l1 = kG (d) l2 = kG

Where l1 and l2 = Distance of two masses from the centre of gravity of the body, and

kG = Radius of gyration of the body.

13. In an engine, the work done by inertia forces in a cycle is [a ]

(a) positive (b) zero (c) negative (d) none of these

14. The resultant forces acting on a body together with reversed effective forces are in

equilibrium, is given by [ a ]

a) D Alemberts Principle b) Newtons Law c) Thermodynamics Law d) None

15. the up and down moment of a Naval Ship is known as [ b ]

a) Steering b) Pitching c) Rolling d)None

16. The fore end of a Naval Ship is termed as [b ]

a) Stern b) Bow c) Port d) Star board

17. The moment of a naval ship with respect to longitudinal axis is known as [c ]

a) Steering b) Pitching c) Rolling d) None

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 88

18. The effect of gyroscopic couple in case of rolling of naval ship [c ]

a) Maximum b) Minimum c) No effect d) None

19. Banking of a road surface means [ a ]

a) Inner rail down on outer rail up b) Inner rail up on outer rail down

c) Both rails on same level d) None

20. The pitching of a naval ship is assumed to be [ c ]

a) Linear Motion b) Rotary Motion c) S H M d) None

Unit II

1. The distance between the centers of the adjacent rivets in the same row is called

[A ]

A) pitch B) margin C) row pitch D) diagonal pitch

2. According to I.B.R , safety factor of rivet joint should not be less than ___.[ D ]

(A)3 B) 2 C)5 D) 4

3. The angle of inclination of the plane, at which the body begins to move down the

plane, is called [ a ]

(a) angle of friction (b) angle of repose (c) angle of projection d) None

4. In a screw jack, the effort required to lift the load W is given by [ b ]

(a) P = W tan (α – φ) (b) P = W tan (α + φ)

(c) P = W cos (α – φ) (d) P = W cos (α + φ)

where α = Helix angle, and

φ = Angle of friction.

5. The efficiency of a screw jack is given by [ b ]

6. The radius of a friction circle for a shaft of radius r rotating inside a bearing is [ a ]

(a) r sin φ (b) r cos φ (c) r tan φ (d) r cot φ

7. The efficiency of a screw jack is maximum, when [ b ]

8. The maximum efficiency of a screw jack is [ a]

9. The frictional torque transmitted in a flat pivot bearing, considering uniform pressure,

is [ b]

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 89

where μ = Coefficient of friction,

W = Load over the bearing, and

R = Radius of the bearing surface.

10. The frictional torque transmitted in a conical pivot bearing, considering uniform

wear, is [ a ]

where R = Radius of the shaft, and

α = Semi-angle of the cone.

11. The frictional torque transmitted by a disc or plate clutch is same as that of [ b ]

(a) flat pivot bearing (b) flat collar bearing

(c) conical pivot bearing (d) trapezoidal pivot bearing

12. The frictional torque transmitted by a cone clutch is same as that of [ d ]

(a) flat pivot bearing (b) flat collar bearing

(c) conical pivot bearing (d) trapezoidal pivot bearing

13. The brakes commonly used in railway trains is [ a ]

a) shoe brake (b) band brake

c) band and block brake (d) internal expanding brake

14. The brake commonly used in motor cars is [ d]

(a )shoe brake (b) band brake

(c) band and block brake (d) internal expanding brake

15. When brakes are applied to all the four wheels of a moving car, the distance travelled

by

the car before it is brought to rest, will be [ b ]

(a) maximum (b) minimum c) Zero d) None

16. Which of the following is an absorption type dynamometer? [ a ]

a) prony brake dynamometer (b) torsion dynamometer

c) epicyclic-train dynamometer (d) None

17. A band brake having band-width of 80mm, drum diameter of 250mm, coefficient of

friction of 0.25 and angle of wrap of 270 degrees is required to exert a friction torque of

1000N-m. The maximum tension (in kN) developed in the band is [C ]

(A) 1.88 (B) 3.56 (C) 6.12 (D) 11.56 GATE 2010

18. Automatically engaged and disengaged clutch is known as [ c ]

a) Disc clutch b) Cone Clutch c) Centrifugal Clutch d) None

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 90

19. The brake applied on brake drum in radial direction is known as [ a ]

a) Radial brake b) Axial brake c) Hydrodynamic brake d) None

A 1 kg block is resting on a surface with coefficient of friction μ = 0.1. A force of 0.8N is

applied to the block as shown in figure. The friction force is [ B]

(A) 0 (B) 0.8N (C) 0.98N (D) 1.2N

GATE 2011

20. Which of the following is a transmission type dynamometer? [ c ]

a)Prony brake dynamometer (b) rope brake dynamometer

c)epicyclic-train dynamometer (d) None

Unit III

13. A flywheel connected to a punching machine has to supply energy of 400 Nm while

running at a mean angular speed of 20 radians/s. If the total fluctuation of speed is not to

exceed ±2%, the mass moment of inertia of the flywheel in 2 kg − m is

[A]

14. (A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 100 (D) 125

15.

16.

17. In a turning moment diagram, the variations of energy above and below the mean

resisting torque line is called [ a ]

18. a) fluctuation of energy b) maximum fluctuation of energy

19. c) coefficient of fluctuation of energy c)none of the above

20.

21. The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of speed to the mean speed is called [ c ]

22. a) fluctuation of speed (b) maximum fluctuation of speed

23. c) coefficient of fluctuation of speed (d) none of these

24. CS = Coefficient of fluctuation of speed, and

25. ω= Mean angular speed = ( ω1 + ω2 )/2

26.

27. The maximum fluctuation of energy is the [ b ]

28. a) sum of maximum and minimum energies

29. b) difference between the maximum and minimum energies

30. c) ratio of the maximum energy and minimum energy

31. d) ratio of the mean resisting torque to the work done per cycle

32.

33. The maximum fluctuation of energy in a flywheel is equal to [ d ]

34. (a) I .ω (ω1 − ω2 ) (b) 2 I .ω2 .CS (c) 2E.CS (d) all of these

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 91

36. The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of energy to the, ......... is called coefficient of

fluctuation of energy. [ b ]

37. (a) minimum fluctuation of energy (b) work done per cycle

38. where I = Mass moment of inertia of the flywheel,

39. E = Mean kinetic energy of the flywheel,

40.

41. The height of a Watt’s governor (in metres) in equal to [ c ]

42. (a) 8.95/N2 (b) 89.5/N2 c) 895/N2 (d) 8950/N2

43. where N = Speed of the arm and ball about the spindle axis

44.

45.

46. When the sleeve of a Porter governor moves upwards, the governor speed [ a ]

47. a) increases (b) decreases (c) remains unaffected d)None

48.

49. A Hartnell governor is a [ b ]

50. (a) pendulum type governor (b) spring loaded governor

51. (c) dead weight governor (d) inertia governor

52.

53. Which of the following governor is used to drive a gramophone ? [ c ]

54. (a) Watt governor (b) Porter governor

55. (c) Pickering governor (d) Hartnell governor

56.

57. Which of the following is a spring controlled governor? [ d ]

58. (a) Hartnell (b) Hartung (c) Pickering (d) all of these

59.

60. For two governors A and B, the lift of sleeve of governor A is more than that of

governor B, for a given fractional change in speed. It indicates that [ a ]

61. a) governor A is more sensitive than governor B

62. b) governor B is more sensitive than governor A

63. c) both governors A and B are equally sensitive

64. d) none of the above

65.

66. The sensitiveness of a governor is given by [ b ]

67. (a)ω mean/(ω2 −ω1) (b) (ω2 −ω1)/ ωmean (c) (ω2 −ω1)/ 2ωmean (d)none where

ω1 and ω2 = Minimum and maximum angular speed, and

68. ωmean = Mean angular speed.

69.

70. In a Hartnell governor, if a spring of greater stiffness is used, then the governor will

[ b ]

71. (a) more sensitive (b) less sensitive (c) isochronous d) None

72.

73. A governor is said to be hunting, if the speed of the engine [ d ]

74. a) remains constant at the mean speed b) is above the mean speed

75. c) is below the mean speed

76. d) fluctuates continuously above and below the mean speed.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 92

78. A hunting governor is [ c ]

79. a) more stable (b) less sensitive (c) more sensitive (d) none

80.

81. Isochronism in a governor is desirable when [ b ]

82. a) the engine operates at low speeds b) the engine operates at high speeds

83. c) the engine operates at variable speeds d) one speed is desired under one load

84.

85. When the relation between the controlling force (Fc ) and radius of rotation (r) for a

spring controlled governor is Fc = a.r + b, then the governor will be [b ]

86. a) stable (b) unstable c) isochronous d) None

87.

88. A governor which canot be ischronous is [ a ]

89. a) porter b) Hartnell c) Watt d) Hartung

90.

91. When the relation between the controlling force (Fc ) and radius of rotation (r) for a

spring controlled governor is Fc = a.r, then the governor will be [ c ]

92. a) stable (b) unstable c) isochronous d) None

Unit IV

1. The balancing of rotating and reciprocating parts of an engine is necessary when it runs

at

[ c ]

(a) slow speed (b) medium speed (c) high speed

2. A disturbing mass m1 attached to a rotating shaft may be balanced by a single mass m2

attached in the same plane of rotation as that of m1 such that [ b ]

(a) m1.r2 = m2.r1 (b) m1.r1 = m2.r2 (c) m1. m2 = r1.r2

3. For static balancing of a shaft, [ a ]

(a) the net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero

(b) the net couple due to the dynamic forces acting on the shaft is equal to zero

(c) both (a) and (b)

(d) none of the above

4. For dynamic balancing of a shaft, [ c ]

(a) the net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero

(b) the net couple due to dynamic forces acting on the shaft is equal to zero

(c) both (a) and (b)

(d) none of the above

5. In order to have a complete balance of the several revolving masses in different planes

[ c]

(a) the resultant force must be zero

(b) the resultant couple must be zero

(c) both the resultant force and couple must be zero

(d) none of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 93

6.The primary unbalanced force is maximum when the angle of inclination of the crank

with the line of stroke is [ c ]

(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) 360°

7. The partial balancing means [ b ]

(a) balancing partially the revolving masses (b) balancing partially the reciprocating

masses

(c) best balancing of engines (d) all of the above

8.In order to facilitate the starting of locomotive in any position, the cranks of a

locomotive, with two cylinders, are placed at . . . . . . to each other. [ b ]

a) 45° (b) 90° (c) 120° (d) 180°

9.In a locomotive, the ratio of the connecting rod length to the crank radius is kept very

large in order to [ b ]

(a) minimise the effect of primary forces (b) minimise the effect of secondary forces

(c) have perfect balancing (d) start the locomotive quickly

10.The swaying couple is maximum or minimum when the angle of inclination of the

crank to the line of stroke ( θ ) is equal to [ b ]

(a) 45° and 135° (b) 90° and 135°

(c) 135° and 225° (d) 45° and 225°

11.The tractive force is maximum or minimum when the angle of inclination of the crank

to the line of stroke ( θ ) is equal to [ d ]

(a) 90° and 225° (b) 135° and 180° (c) 180° and 225° (d) 135° and 315°

12. The swaying couple is due to the [ a ]

(a) primary unbalanced force (b) secondary unbalanced force

(c) two cylinders of locomotive (d) partial balancing

13.In a locomotive, the maximum magnitude of the unbalanced force along the

perpendicular to the line of stroke, is known as [ c ]

(a ) tractive force (b) swaying couple (c) hammer blow (d) none of these

14.The effect of hammer blow in a locomotive can be reduced by [ d]

(a) decreasing the speed (b) using two or three pairs of wheels coupled together

(c) balancing whole of the reciprocating parts (d) both (a) and (b)

15.Multi-cylinder engines are desirable because [c ]

(a) only balancing problems are reduced (b) only flywheel size is reduced

(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

16.When the primary direct crank of a reciprocating engine makes an angle θ with the

line of stroke, then the secondary direct crank will make an angle of . . . . . with the line

of stroke.

[ c ]

(a) θ /2 (b) θ (c) 2 θ (d) 4 θ

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 94

17. Secondary forces in reciprocating mass on engine frame are [ a ]

(a) of same frequency as of primary forces (b) twice the frequency as of primary forces

(c) four times the frequency as of primary forces (d) none of the above

18.The secondary unbalanced force produced by the reciprocating parts of a certain

cylinder of a given engine with crank radius r and connecting rod length l can be

considered as equal to primary unbalanced force produced by the same weight having

[ a ]

(a) an equivalent crank radius r2/4l and rotating at twice the speed of the engine

(b) r2/4l as equivalent crank radius and rotating at engine speed

(c) equivalent crank length of r2/4l and rotating at engine speed

(d) none of the above

19. Which of the following statement is correct? [c ]

(a) In any engine, 100% of the reciprocating masses can be balanced dynamically

(b) In the case of balancing of multicylinder engine, the value of secondary force is

higher than the value of the primary force

(c) In the case of balancing of multimass rotating systems, dynamic balancing can be

directly

started without static balancing done to the system

(d) none of the above.

20.Inradial engine , since the plane of rotation of the various cranks is same there is no

[ a ]

a) unbalanced primary and secondary forces b) unbalanced primary

c) unbalanced secondary forces d) None

Unit V

1. When there is a reduction in amplitude over every cycle of vibration, then the body is

said to have [ c ]

(a) free vibration (b) forced vibration (c) damped vibration d) None

2. Longitudinal vibrations are said to occur when the particles of a body moves [b]

a) perpendicular to its axis (b) parallel to its axis (c) in a circle about its axis

3. When a body is subjected to transverse vibrations, the stress induced in a body will be

[ b]

(a) shear stress (b) tensile stress (c) compressive stress

4. The natural frequency (in Hz) of free longitudinal vibrations is equal to [ d ]

(a) 1/2π s/m (b 1/2π δ/g (c ) 0.4985/δ d) All of the above

where m = Mass of the body in kg,

s = Stiffness of the body in N/m, and

δ = Static deflection of the body in metre

5.The factor which affects the critical speed of a shaft is [ d ]

(a) diameter of the disc (b) span of the shaft

(c) eccentricity (d) all of these

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 95

5. The equation of motion for a vibrating system with viscous damping is d x2/ dt2 +

c/mX dx/ dt + s/mXx = 0 If the roots of this equation are real, then the system will be

[ a ]

(a) over damped (b) under damped (c) critically damped

6. In under damped vibrating system, if x1 and x2 are the successive values of the

amplitude on the same side of the mean position, then the logarithmic decrement is equal

to [ b ]

(a) x1/x2 (b) log (x1/x2) (c) loge (x1/x2) (d) log (x1.x2)

7. The ratio of the maximum displacement of the forced vibration to the deflection due to

the static force, is known as [ d ]

(a) damping factor (b) damping coefficient

(c) logarithmic decrement (d) magnification factor

8. In vibration isolation system, if ω/ωn is less than 2 , then for all values of the damping

factor, the transmissibility will be [ c ]

(a) less than unity (b) equal to unity (c) greater than unity (d) zero

where ω = Circular frequency of the system in rad/s, and

ωn = Natural circular frequency of vibration of the system in rad/s.

10. In vibration isolation system, if ω/ωn >1, then the phase difference between the

transmitted force and the disturbing force is [ c ]

(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) 180° (d) 270°

9. The ratio of maximum displacement of the forced vibrations to the static deflection is

called [ d ]

(a) Logarithmic decrement (b) Damping co-efficient

(c) critical damping co-efficient (d)Magnification factor

10. In SHM the product of periodic time ad the frequecy if equal to [ d]

a) Zero b) Unity c) π d) π/2

11. If the damping factor for a vibrating system is unity, the system is [a]

a) Critical damping b) Under damping c) Over damping d) none

12. If the damping factor for a vibrating system is more than unity, the system is [ c ]

a) Critical damping b) Under damping c) Over damping d) none

13. At the nodal point in a shaft the amplitude of torsional vibration is [a ]

a) Zero b) minimum c) maximum d) None

14. A shaft carrying two rotors as its ends will have [ b ]

a) One node b) Two node c) Three node d) None

15. In vibration isolation, which one of the following statements is NOT correct

regarding Transmissibility (T)? [ B ]

(A) T is nearly unity at small excitation frequencies

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 96

(B) T can be always reduced by using higher damping at any excitation frequency

(C) T is unity at the frequency ratio of 2

(D) T is infinity at resonance for undamped systems GATE-2014

16. Figure shows a single degree of freedom system. The system consists of a massless

rigid bar OP hinged at O and a mass m at end P. The natural frequency of vibration of

the system I [A ]

18. Consider a single degree-of-freedom system with viscous damping excited by a

harmonic force. At resonance, the phase angle (in degree) of the displacement with

respect to the exciting force is [ C ]

(A) 0 (B) 45 (C) 90 (D) 135 GATE 2014

19. Critical damping is the [ B ]

(A) Largest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration

(B) Smallest amount of damping for which no oscillation occurs in free vibration

(C) Largest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free vibration

(D) Smallest amount of damping for which the motion is simple harmonic in free

vibration GATE 2015

20.A single degree of freedom system having mass 1 kg and stiffness 10kN/m initially at

rest is subjected to an impulse force of magnitude 5 kN for 10-4 seconds. The amplitude

in mm of the resulting free vibration is [ c]

(A) 0.5 (B) 1.0 (C) 5.0 (D)10.0 GATE 2013

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 97

11.12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 1. Define what is precesional angular motion Knowledge a

2 2. Discuss about right hand screw rule Knowledge b

3 3. Derive a formula for gyroscopic couple. Analysis e

4 4. Write a short note on gyroscope. comprehension c

5 5. Define the pitching of a naval ship. comprehension a

6 When pitching up ward what is the effect of reactive

gyroscopic couple Knowledge a

7 6. What is the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple when

a naval ship is rolling Knowledge a

8 Describe the gyroscopic effect on an aeroplane Analysis a

9

7. What are the conditions for a body to be in

equilibrium under the action of two forces and

torque

Analysis a

10 8. State and explain the D’Alembert’s Principle. Knowledge b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

The turbine rotor of a ship has a mass of 20 tones & a

radius of gyration of 0.75m.Its speed is 2000 rpm.the

ship pitches 6degrees above & below the horizontal

position. One complete oscillation takes 18 sec & the

motion is simple harmonic. Determine

(i)The maximum couple tending to shear the holding

down bolts of the turbine.

(ii)The maximum angular acceleration of the ship

during pitching &

(iii)The direction in which the bow will tend to turn

while rising, if the rotation the rotor is clock wise

when looking from rear.

Apply b

2

A car weighs 20KN. It has a wheel base of 2m, Track

width 1m & Height of C.G. 300 mm above the

ground level & lies midway between the front & rear

axle. The engine flywheel rotates at 3000 rpm

Apply b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 98

clockwise when viewed from the front. The moment of

inertia of the fly wheel is 4kg-m² & MOI of each

wheel is 3 kg-m², find the reactions between the

wheels & the ground when car takes the curve of 15m

radius towards right at 30 km/hr, taking into

consideration the gyroscopic & the centrifugal effects.

Each wheel radius is 400mm

3

The rotor of the turbine of a yacht makes 1200 rpm

clockwise when viewed from the stern. The rotor has a

mass of 750 kg, and its radius of gyration is 250 mm.

Find the maximum gyroscopic couple transmitted to

the hull (body of the yacht), when the yacht pitches

with maximum angular velocity of 1 rad/s.

Analysis b

4

An aeroplane makes a complete half circle of 50

meters radius, towards left, when flying at 200 kmph.

The rotary engine and the propeller of the plane has a

mass of 400 kg. and a radius of gyration of 0.3 m. The

engine rotates at 2400 r.p.m. clockwise when viewed

from the rear. Find the gyroscopic couple on the

aircraft and state its effect on it.

Analysis a

5

A four wheeled motor car of mass 2000 kg has a wheel

base 2.5 m, track width 1.5 m and height of center of

gravity 500 mm above the ground level and lies at 1

meter from the front axle. Each wheel has an an

effective diameter of 0.8 m and a moment of inertia of

0.8 kg-m2. The drive shaft, Engine flywheel and

transmission are rotating at 4 times the speed of road

wheel, in a clockwise direction when viewed from the

front, and is equivalent to a mass of 75 kg having a

radius of gyration of 100 mm. If the car is taking a

right turn of 60 m radius at 60 km/h, find the load on

each wheel.

Analysis a

7

In a slider crank mechanism, the lengths of the crank

and the connecting rod are 480 mm and 1.6 m

respectively. It has an eccentricity of 100 mm.

Assuming a velocity of 20 rad/sec of the crank OA.

Calculate the following at an interval of 30 degrees.

i). Velocity and the acceleration of the slider

ii). Angular velocity and angular acceleration of the

connecting rod.

Apply b

8

In a Four-link mechanism, the dimensions of the links

are: AB=20 mm, BC= 66mm, CD= 56 mm, and AD =

80 mm. AD is the fixed link. The crank rotates at

uniform angular velocity of 10.5 rad/sec in the

counter-clockwise direction. Determine the angular

displacements, angular velocities angular accelarations

of the output link DC and the coupler BC for a

Analysis a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 99

complete revolution of the crank at an interval of 40

degrees.

9

Determine the required input torque on the crank of a

slider-crank mechanism for the static equilibrium

when the applied piston load is 1500N. the lengths of

the crank and the connecting rod are 40mm and 100

mm respectively, and the crank has turned through 450

from the inner dead centre.

Analysis a

10

Synthesize a 4 – bar mechanism to generate a function

y=log x for 1 ≤ x ≤ 2. The range of the output crank

may be chosen as 900 while that of input crank be 600.

Assume three precession points which are to be

obtained from Chebyshev spacings.

Apply a

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Define the phenomena of friction Analysis b

2 Briefly explain about screw jack comprehension a

3 Discuss Briefly about over hauling and self locking of

screw comprehension b

4 Define the terms of angle of repose Analysis e

5 Give a brief account of friction between lubricated

surfaces Knowledge b

6 what ifs friction circle comprehension a

7 what are the various types of mechanical brakes Analysis b

8 Which type of brakes used in locomotive Knowledge e

9 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer Knowledge a

10 what are the varies types of transmission

Dynamometers Knowledge a

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

The lead screw of the lathe has acme threads of 50

mm outside diameter and 10 mm pitch. The included

angle of thread is 29 degrees. It drives a tool carriage

and exerts a pressure of 2500N. A collar bearing with

outside diameter 100mm and inside diameter 50mm is

Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 100

provided to take up the thrust. If the lead screw rotates

at 30 r.p.m. and the efficiency and the power required

to drive the screw. The coefficient of friction for the

screw threads is 0.15 and for the collar is 0.12.

2

A band brake acts o he 3/4th of circumference of a

drum of 450 mm diameter which is keyed to the shaft.

the band brake provided a braking torque of 225 N-m.

One end of the band is attached to a fulcrum pin of the

lever and the other end to a pin 100 mm from the

fulcrum. If the operating force is applied at 500 mm

from the fulcrum and the coefficient of friction is

0.25, find the operating force when the drum rotates

in (a) anti0clockwise, and (b) clockwise direction

Apply a

3

An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted

with a cone clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone

has a face angle of 12.5 0& maximum mean diameter

of 500 mm. The co-efficient of friction is 0.2. The

normal pressure on the clutch face is not to exceed 0.1

N/mm2.Dtermine 1. The axial spring force necessary

to engage to clutch.2.The face width required.

Apply b

4

A truck has 3.15 m wheel base & the C.G. is 1.28 m

in front of the rear axle & 0.9 m above ground level.

The co efficient of adhesion between tyres & road is

0.6 & the brakes are applied to the rear wheels only.

What is the minimum distance in which the truck can

be stopped on a level road when travelling at 48

kmph? If the weight of the truck is 8 tones, find the

pressure on each wheel during braking?

Analysis a

5

A single plate clutch is required to transmit 26.5 KW

at 1600 rpm. The outer diameter of the plate is limited

to 300 mm & intensity of the pressure between the

plates is not exceeds 68.5 KN/m2 Assuming uniform

wear & co-efficient of friction is µ is 0.3, show that

the inner diameter of the plate is approximately 90

mm.

Apply b

6

An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted

with a cone clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone

has a face angle of 12.5 0& maximum mean diameter

of 500 mm. The co-efficient of friction is 0.2. The

normal pressure on the clutch face is not to exceed 0.1

N/mm2.Dtermine 1. The axial spring force necessary

to engage to clutch.2.The face width required.

Apply b

7

A single block brake has the drum diameter 250 mm.

The angle of contact is 900 & co-efficient of friction

between the drum & the lining is 0.35. If the operating

force of 650 N is applied at the end of the lever,

determine the torque that may be transmitted by the

Analysis a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 101

block brake?

8

A truck has 3.15 m wheel base & the C.G. is 1.28 m

in front of the rear axle & 0.9 m above ground level.

The co efficient of adhesion between tyres & road is

0.6 & the brakes are applied to the rear wheels only.

What is the minimum distance in which the truck can

be stopped on a level road when traveling at 48

kmph? If the weight of the truck is 8 tones, find the

pressure on each wheel during braking?

Apply b

9

A bicycle & rider of mass 100 kg are traveling at the

rate of 16 kmph on a level road. A brake is applied to

the rear wheel which is 0.9 m in diameter & this is the

only resistance acting. How far will the bicycle travel

& how many turns will it make before it comes to

rest. The pressure applied on the brake is 100 N & the

co-efficient of friction is 0.2

Apply b

10

A car is moving on a level road at a speed of 36

kmph. Its C.G. lies at a distance of 0.6 m from the

ground level. The wheel base is 2.4 m & the

distance of C.G from the rear wheels is 0.9 m. Find

the distance traveled by the car before coming to

rest when brakes are applied, 1.To the rear wheels.

2. To the front wheels. 3. To all the four wheels.

The co-efficient of friction between the tyres & the

road surface is 0.45.

Apply b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Define coefficient of fluctuation of speed Knowledge b

2 What is the function of flywheel Knowledge e

3 What is the formula for max fluctuation of energy in a

flywheel Analysis b

4 Define coefficient of fluctuation of Energy comprehension a

5 Discuss the turning moment diagram comprehension b

6 What is the Coefficient of steadiness Knowledge e

7 Explain precisely the uses of turning moment diagram

of a 4 stroke cycle internal combustion engine? Knowledge b

8 What is the function of a fly wheel? How does it differ

from that of a governor? Analysis e

9 What is the function of fly wheel in punching press Analysis b

10 Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder

double acting steam engine? Knowledge a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 102

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is

drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm =

5 N-m; crank angle, 1 mm = 10. The turning moment

diagram repeats itself at every half revolution of the

engine & the areas above & below the mean turning

moment line taken in order are 295, 685,40, 340,

960,270 mm2 . The rotating parts are equivalent to a

mass of 36 kg at the radius of gyration of 150 mm.

Determine the co efficient of fluctuation of speed when

the engine runs at 1800 rpm.

Apply b

2

The turning moment diagram of a multi cylinder engine

is drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm

= 600 N-m vertically;& 1mm = 30 horizontally, The

intercepted areas between the output torque curve & the

mean resistance line, taken in order from one end, are as

follows : +52 -124, +92, -140, + 85, -72 & +107 mm2.

When the engine is running at a speed of 600 rpm. If the

total fluctuation of speed is not to exceed± 1.5 % of the

mean, find the necessary mass of the flywheel of radius

0.5 m.

Apply e

3

The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is

drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm =

6 N-m; crank angle, 1 mm = 20. The turning moment

diagram repeats itself at every half revolution of the

engine & the areas above & below the mean turning

moment line taken in order are 290, 680,45, 345,

965,275 mm2 . The rotating parts are equivalent to a

mass of 36 kg at the radius of gyration of 155 mm.

Determine the co efficient of fluctuation of speed when

the engine runs at 1850 rpm.

Apply b

4

The turning moment diagram of a multi cylinder engine

is drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm

= 500 N-m vertically;& 1mm = 35 horizontally, The

intercepted areas between the output torque curve & the

mean resistance line, taken in order from one end, are as

follows : +53,-125,+93, -142, + 86, -73 & +108 mm2.

When the engine is running at a speed of 600 rpm. If the

total fluctuation of speed is not to exceed± 1.6 % of the

mean, find the necessary mass of the flywheel of radius

0.6 m.

Apply a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 103

5

The mass of the flywheel of an engine is 6.5 tones & the

radius of gyration is 1.8 m. It is found from the turning

moment diagram that the fluctuation of energy is 56

KN-m. If the mean speed of the engine is 120 rpm, find

the maximum & minimum speeds

Apply b

6

The equation of the turning moment curve of a three

crank engine is (5000 + 1500 sin 3θ ) N-m, where θ is

the crank angle in radians. the moment of inertia of the

flywheel is 1000kg-m2 and the mean speed is 300r.p.m

calculate:1.power of the engine, and 2.the maximum

fluctuation of the speed of the flywheel in percentage

when (i) the resisting torque is constant, and(ii)the

resisting torque is (500+600 sin θ)N-m.

Apply b

7

The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is

drawn to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm =

5 N-m; crank angle, 1 mm = 10. The turning moment

diagram repeats itself at every half revolution of the

engine & the areas above & below the mean turning

moment line taken in order are 295, 685,40, 340,

960,270 mm2 . The rotating parts are equivalent to a

mass of 36 kg at the radius of gyration of 150 mm.

Determine the co efficient of fluctuation of speed when

the engine runs at 1800 rpm.

Apply b

8

In a spring loaded governor of the Hartnell type, the

mass of each ball is 1kg, length of vertical arm of the

bell crank lever is 100 mm and that of the horizontal

arm is 50 mm. The distance of fulcrum of each bell

crank lever is 80 mm from the axis of rotation of the

governor. The extreme radii of rotation of the balls are

75 mm and 112.5mm. The maximum equilibrium speed

is 5 per cent greater than the minimum equilibrium

speed which is 360 r.p.m. Find, neglecting obliquity of

arms, initial compression of the spring and equilibrium

speed corresponding to the radius of rotation of 100

mm.

Analysis e

9

A hart Nell governor having a central sleeve spring and

two right-angled bell crank levers moves between 290

r.p.m. and 310 r.p.m. for sleeve lift of 15 mm. The

sleeve arms and ball arms are 80 mm and 120 mm

respectively. The leavers are pivoted at 120 mm from

the governor axis and mass of each ball is 2.5 k. the ball

arms are parallel to the governor axis at the lowest

equilibrium speed. Determine: 1. loads on the spring at

lowest and the highest equilibrium speeds, and 2.

stiffness of the spring.

Analysis b

10

The following particulars refer to a Wilson-Hart Nell

governor: Mass of each ball = 125 mm; maximum

radius =175 mm ; minimum speed = 240 r.p.m ;

Apply a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 104

maximum speed = 250 r.p.m ; length of the ball arm of

each bell crank lever=150 mm; length of the sleeve arm

bell crank lever = 100 mm; combined stiffness of the

two ball springs = 0.2 kN/m. Find the equivalent

stiffness of the auxiliary spring referred to the sleeve.

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Why is balancing of rotating parts necessary for high

speed engines ? Analysis b

2

Explain clearly the terms ‘static balancing’ and

‘dynamic balancing’. State the necessary conditions to

achieve them.

comprehension e

3 Discuss how a single revolving mass is balanced by

two masses revolving in different planes. comprehension b

4 Explain the method of balancing of different masses

revolving in the same plane. Analysis a

5 How the different masses rotating in different planes

are balanced ? Knowledge b

6 Write a short note on primary and secondary balancing. comprehension b

7 Explain why only a part of the unbalanced force due to

reciprocating masses is balanced by revolving mass. Analysis e

8 What are in-line engines ? How are they balanced ? It

is possible to balance them completely ? Knowledge b

9 Explain the ‘direct and reverse crank’ method for

determining unbalanced forces in radial engines. Knowledge a

10 Discuss the balancing of V-engines Knowledge b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 105

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

Four masses m1 ,m2, m3 and m4 are 200 kg , 300 kg , 240

kg , and 260 kg respectively. The corresponding radii of

rotation are 0.2m , 0.15m, 0.25m and 0.3m respectively

and the angles between successive masses are 45 degree,

35 degree and 135 degree. Find the postion and magnitude

of the balance mass required, if its radius of the rotation is

0.2m.

Analysis b

2

A,B,C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at

radii 100, 125, 200 and 150 mm respectively. The planes

in which the masses revolve are spaced 600 mm apart and

the mass of B,C and D are 10 kg, 5 kg and 4 kg

respectively. Find the required mass a and the relative

angular settings of the four masses so that the shaft shall

be in complete balance.

Apply e

3

A shaft has three eccentrics, each 75 mm diameter and 25

mm thick, machined in one piece with the shaft. The

central planes of the eccentric are 60 mm apart. The

distance of the centers from the axis of rotation are 12

mm, 18 mm and 12 mm and their angular positions are

120 degrees apart. The density of metal is 7000 kg /m3.

Find the amount of out-of-balance force and couple at 600

r.p.m. If the shaft is balanced by adding two masses at a

radius 75 mm at distances of 100 mm from the central

plane of the middle eccentric, find the amount of masses

and their angular positions.

Apply b

4

A shaft carrier five masses A,B,C,D and E which revolves

at the same radius in planes which are equidistant from

one another. The magnitude of the masses in planes A, C

and D are 50 kg, 40 kg and 80 kg respectively. The angle

between A and C and that between C and D is 135

degrees. Determine the magnitude the masses in planes

Band E and their position to put the shaft in complete

rotating balance.

Analysis a

5

A,B,C and D are four masses carried by a rotating shaft at

radii 100 mm, 150 mm ,150mm and 200mm respectively.

The planes in which the masses rotate are spaced at

500mm apart and the magnitude of the masses B,C and D

are 9kg,5 kg and 4 kg respectively. Find the required mass

A and the relative angular settings for the four masses so

that the shaft shall in complete balance.

Apply b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 106

6

In an in-line six cylinder engine a working on two stroke

cycle, the cylinder center lines are spaced at 600 mm. in

end view, the crank shaft 60 degree apart and in the order

1-4-5-2-3-6. The stroke of each piston is 400 mm and the

connecting rod length is 1 meter. The mass of the

reciprocating parts is 200 kg per cylinder and that of

rotating parts 100 kg per crank .The engine rotates at 300

r.p.m. examine the engine for the balance of primary and

secondary forces and couple. Find the maximum

unbalanced forces and couples.

Apply e

7

A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm long.

The planes of rotation of the first, second and fourth

cranks are 400 mm, 200 mm and 200 mm respectively

from the third crank and their reciprocating masses are 50

kg, 60 kg and 50 kg respectively. Find the mass of the

reciprocating parts for the third cylinder and the relative

angular positions of the cranks in order that the engine

may be in complete primary balance.

Analysis b

8

A four crank engine has the two outer cranks set at 120° to

each other, and their reciprocating masses are each 400

kg. The distance between the planes of rotation of adjacent

cranks are 450 mm, 750 mm and 600 mm. If the engine is

to be in complete primary balance, find the reciprocating

mass and the relative angular position for each of the inner

cranks. If the length of each crank is 300 mm, the length

of each connecting rod is 1.2 m and the speed of rotation

is 240 r.p.m., what is the maximum secondary unbalanced

force ?

Apply a

9

The firing order in a 6 cylinder vertical four stroke in-line

engine is 1-4-2-6-3-5. The piston stroke is 100 mm and

the length of each connecting rod is 200 mm. The pitch

distances between the cylinder centre lines are 100 mm,

100 mm, 150 mm, 100 mm, and 100 mm respectively.

The reciprocating mass per cylinder is 1 kg and the engine

runs at 3000 r.p.m. Determine the out-of-balance primary

and secondary forces and couples on this engine, taking a

plane midway between the cylinder 3 and 4 as the

reference plane.

Apply b

10

The three cylinders of an air compressor have their axes

120° to one another, and their connecting rods are coupled

to a single crank. The stroke is 100 mm and the length of

each connecting rod is 150 mm. The mass of the

reciprocating parts per cylinder is 1.5 kg. Find the

maximum primary and secondary forces acting on the

frame of the compressor when running at 3000 r.p.m.

Describe clearly a method by which such forces may be

balanced.

Apply e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 107

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Short Answer Questions

1 What are the causes and effects of vibrations ? Knowledge b

2 Define, in short, free vibrations, forced vibrations and

damped vibrations. Knowledge e

3 Discuss briefly with neat sketches the longitudinal,

transverse and torsional free vibrations. Analysis b

4

Derive an expression for the natural frequency of free

transverse and longitudinal vibrations by equilibrium

method.

comprehension b

5 Discuss the effect of inertia of the shaft in longitudinal

and transverse vibrations. comprehension e

6 Deduce an expression for the natural frequency of free

transverse vibrations for a simply supported Knowledge b

7 Establish an expression for the amplitude of forced

vibrations. Knowledge a

8 Deduce an expression for the natural frequency of free

transverse vibrations for a beam fixed at Analysis b

9 Explain the terms ‘under damping, critical damping’ and

‘over damping’ Analysis b

10

Establish an expression for the natural frequency of free

transverse vibrations for a simply supported beam

carrying a number of point loads, by (a) Energy method ;

and (b) Dunkerley’s method.

Knowledge e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Long Answer Questions

1

A beam of length 10 m carries two loads of mass 200 kg

at distances of 3 m from each end together with a central

load of mass 1000 kg. Calculate the frequency of

transverse vibrations. Neglect the mass of the beam and

take I = 109 mm4 and E = 205×103 N/mm2.

Apply b

2

A steel bar 25 mm wide and 50 mm deep is freely

supported at two points 1 m apart and carries amass of

200 kg in the middle of the bar. Neglecting the mass of

the bar, find the frequency of transverse vibration .If an

additional mass of 200 kg is distributed uniformly over

the length of the shaft, what will be the frequency of

vibration ? Take E = 200 GN/m2.

Apply e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 108

3

A vertical shaft 25 mm diameter and 0.75 m long is

mounted in long bearings and carries a pulley of mass 10

kg midway between the bearings. The centre of pulley is

0.5 mm from the axis of theshaft. Find (a) the whirling

speed, and (b) the bending stress in the shaft, when it is

rotating at 1700r.p.m. Neglect the mass of the shaft and E

= 200 GN/m2.

Analysis b

4

A vibrating system consists of a mass of 8 kg, spring of

stiffness 5.6 N/mm and a dashpot of damping coefficient

of 40 N/m/s. Find (a) damping factor, (b) logarithmic

decrement, and (c) ratio of the two consecutive

amplitudes.

Apply a

5

A mass of 5 kg is supported by a spring of stiffness 5

kN/m. In addition, the motion of mass by a damper

whose resistance is proportional to velocity. The

amplitude of vibration reduces to 1/15th of the initial

amplitude in four complete cycles. Determine the

damping force per unit velocity and the ratio of the

frequencies of the damped and undamped vibrations.

Apply b

6

A shaft 50 mm diameter and 3 meters long is simply

supported at the ends and carries three loads of 1000 N,

and 1500 N and 750 N at 1 m, 2 m and 2.5 m from the

left support. The young’s modulus for shaft material is

200 GN/m2. Find the frequency of transverse vibration.

Apply b

7

A motor drives a centrifugal pump through gearing the

pump speed being one-third that of the motor. The shaft

from the motor to the pinion is 60 mm diameter and 300

mm long .The movement of inertia of the motor is 400

kg-m2 the impeller shaft is 100 mm diameter 600 mm

long .The movement of inertia of the impeller is 1500 kg

–m2 neglecting inertia of the gears and shaft,determine

the frequency of torsional vibration of the system the

modulus of rigidity of the shaft material is 80 GN /m2.

Apply e

8

An electric motor is to drive centrifuge a running at four

times the motor speed through a spur gear and pinion

.The shaft from the motor to the gear wheel is 54 mm

diameter and L meter long ;the shaft from the pinion to

the centrifuge is 45 mm diameter and 400 mm long .The

masses and radii of gyration of motor and centrifuge are

respectively 37.5 kg,100 mm; 30 kg and 140 mm.

Analysis b

9

A shaft of 100 mm diameter and 1 meter long is fixed at

one end and other end carries a flywheel of masses

one ton .The radius of gyration of the flywheel is

0.5m.Find the frequency of torsional vibrations if the

modulus of rigidity for the shaft materials 80GN/m2.

Analysis b

10 The flywheel of an engine driving a dynamo as a mass of Apply e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 109

one eighty kgs and a radius of gyration of 30 mm .The

shaft at the flywheel end as an effective length of 250mm

is 50mm diameter .The armature mass is 120kg and it

radius of gyration is 22.5mm the dynamo shaft is 43mm

diameter and 200mm effective length calculate the

position of node and frequency of trosional

oscillation,C=83 KN/mm2

11. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Apply gyroscopic principle to aircrafts. Evaluate e

2 Explain what do you understand by static equilibrium

of a body? Remember a

3

What is the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple on an

aeroplane when taking left turn and the propeller

rotating clock wise

Understand a

4

What is the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple on a

naval ship when taking left turn and the rotor rotating

clock wise

Evaluate e

5 Explain about angle of heel in stability of two wheel

vehicle Evaluate e

6 Briefly describe about piston effort Remember a

7 Differentiate between pitching and rolling of naval

ship Understand a

8

What are the conditions for a body to be in

equilibrium under the action of two force and three

forces?

Analysis b

9 9. What is the effect of reactive gyroscopic couple when

a naval ship is rolling? Understand b

10 10. Define the pitching of a naval ship. Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 110

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

1. A boat is propelled by a steam turbine. The moment of

inertia of the rotor shaft and propeller is 60 kg-m2.

The turbine runs at 3000rpm in clockwise direction

looking from the front .The boat describes a circular

path towards the right making one revolution in 10

seconds. Find the magnitude and direction of the

couple acting on boat hull

Evaluate e

2

2. An Aero plane makes a complete half circle radius

towards left when flying at 210 km/hr. The rotary

engine and the propeller of the plane is of 50 kg mass

having a radius of gyration of 300mm.The engine

rotates at 2400 rpm clockwise as seen from the rear.

Find the Gyroscopic couple on the aircraft and its

effect on the plane.

Apply a

3

3. The moment of inertia of each wheel of a motorcycle

is 1.5kg-m2.The rotating parts of the engine of the

motorcycle have moment of inertia of 0.28kg-m2.The

speed of the engine is six times the speed of the

wheels and is in same direction. The mass of the

motorcycle is 250 kg and its centre of gravity is 0.6m

above the ground level. Find the angle of Wheel if the

motor cycle is travelling at 45km/hr and is taking a

turn of 30m radius. The Wheel diameter is 0.6m.

Apply

4

4. A Racing car of mass 2000kg has a wheel base of 2m

and track width of 1m.The C.G. lies midway between

the front and rear axles and is 0.4m above the ground.

The engine of the car has a flywheel rotating in a

clockwise direction when seen from the front at 6000

rpm. The moment of inertia of the flywheel is 50 kg-

m2.If the car takes a curve of 15m radius towards

right, while running at 45 km/hr , find the reaction

between the wheels and the ground considering the

gyroscopic and centrifugal effect of the fly wheel and

the weight of the car respectively.

Evaluate e

5

5. The mass of turbine rotor of a ship is 20tonnes and

has a radius of gyration 0.60 m. Its speed is 2000rpm.

The ship pitches 60 above and 60 below the horizontal

position. A complete oscillation takes 30 seconds and

motion is simple harmonic. Determine 1.Maximum

gyroscopic couple and 2. The direction in which the

Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 111

bow will tend to turn when rising, if the rotation of the

rotor is clockwise when looking from the left.

6 6. Explain the application of gyroscopic principles to

aircrafts. Understand b

7 7. What do you understand by gyroscopic couple?

Derive the formula for its magnitude. Understand e

8

8. Explain what do you understand by static equilibrium

of a body? Also explain the equilibrium of four force

members.

Remember a

9

9. Explain the effect of the gyroscopic couple on the

reaction of the 4 wheels of a vehicle negotiating a

curve.

Understand a

10

10. A car weighs 20KN. It has a wheel base of 2m, Track

width 1m & Height of C.G. 300 mm above the

ground level & lies midway between the front & rear

axle. The engine flywheel rotates at 3000 rpm

clockwise when viewed from the front. The moment

of inertia of the fly wheel is 4kg-m² & MOI of each

wheel is 3 kg-m², find the reactions between the

wheels & the ground when car takes the curve of 15m

radius towards right at 30 km/hr, taking into

consideration the gyroscopic & the centrifugal effects.

Each wheel radius is 400mm

Evaluate e

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Derive expression for efficiency of screw jack terms of

mechanical advantage and velocity ratio Understand a

2 What ifs friction circle Analysis b

3

Which of the two assumptions uniform intensity of

pressure or uniform rate of wear, would you make use of

in designing friction clutch & why?

Understand b

4 What is the function of brake Evaluate e

5 What are the various types of mechanical brakes Remember a

6 What are leading and trailing shoes of a internal

expanding brakes Understand a

7 Which type of brakes used in locomotive Understand a

8 What is meant by self locking and self energised brake Analysis b

9 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer Understand b

10 What are the varies types of transmission Dynamometers Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 112

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Describe with neat sketch working of a single plate

friction clutch? Remember a

2

Establish a formula for the maximum torque transmitted

by a single plate clutch of external & internal radii is r1

& r2, if the limiting co-efficient of friction is µ & the

axial spring load W.

Understand a

3 Explain the working of a centrifugal clutch with a neat

sketch Analysis b

4 Explain about cone clutch with neat sketch? Understand b

5 With neat sketch explain the Rope Brake Dynamometer? Evaluate e

6 Explain about Band Brake& derive the expression for

torque? Remember a

7 Explain the function of Absorption type Dynamometer? Understand a

8

An engine developing 45KW at 1000 rpm is fitted with a

cone clutch built inside a fly wheel. The cone has a face

angle of 12.5 0& maximum mean diameter of 500 mm.

The co-efficient of friction is 0.2. The normal pressure

on the clutch face is not to exceed 0.1 N/mm2.Dtermine

Analysis b

9

A single block brake has the drum diameter 250 mm.

The angle of contact is 900 & co-efficient of friction

between the drum & the lining is 0.35. If the operating

force of 650 N is applied at the end of the lever,

determine the torque that may be transmitted by the

block brake?

Understand b

10

A car engine has its rated output of 10kW. Maximum

torque developed is 100Nm. The clutch used is of single

plate type having two active surfaces. Axial pressure is

not to exceed 0.85 bar. External diameter of the friction

plate is 1.25 times the internal diameter. Determine the

dimensions of the friction plate and the axial force

exerted by the springs. Assume uniform wear and

coefficient of friction as O.3.

Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 113

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder

double acting steam engine. Analysis b

2 Explain precisely the uses of turning moment diagram of

reciprocating engines. Understand b

3 Explain the turning moment diagram of a four stroke

cycle internal combustion engine. Evaluate e

4 Discuss the turning moment diagram of a multicylinder

engine. Remember a

5 Explain the terms ‘fluctuation of energy’ and

‘fluctuation of speed’ as applied to flywheels. Understand a

6

Define the terms ‘coefficient of fluctuation of energy’

and ‘coefficient of fluctuation of speed’, in the case of

flywheels.

Analysis b

7 What is the function of a flywheel? How does it differ

from that of a governor? Understand b

8 Draw the turning moment diagram of a single cylinder

double acting steam engine. Analysis b

9 Prove that the sensitiveness of a Proell governor is

greater than that of a Porter governor. Understand b

10 Write short note on ‘coefficient of insensitiveness’ of

governors. Evaluate e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

The mass of the flywheel of an engine is 6.5 tones & the

radius of gyration is 1.8 m. It is found from the turning

moment diagram that the fluctuation of energy is 56 KN-

m. If the mean speed of the engine is 120 rpm, find the

maximum & minimum speeds

Evaluate e

2

The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is drawn

to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm = 5 N-m;

crank angle, 1 mm = 10. The turning moment diagram

repeats itself at every half revolution of the engine & the

areas above & below the mean turning moment line

taken in order are 295, 685,40, 340, 960,270 mm2 . The

rotating parts are equivalent to a mass of 36 kg at the

Remember a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 114

radius of gyration of 150 mm. Determine the co efficient

of fluctuation of speed when the engine runs at 1800

rpm.

3

The turning moment diagram of a petrol engine is drawn

to the following scales: Turning moment, 1mm = 6 N-m;

crank angle, 1 mm = 20. The turning moment diagram

repeats itself at every half revolution of the engine & the

areas above & below the mean turning moment line

taken in order are 290, 680,45, 345, 965,275 mm2 . The

rotating parts are equivalent to a mass of 36 kg at the

radius of gyration of 155 mm. Determine the co efficient

of fluctuation of speed when the engine runs at 1850

rpm.

Understand a

4

A punching machine carries out 6 holes per minute.

Each hole of 40 mm diameter in 35 mm thick plate

requires 8N-m of energy/mm2 of the sheared area. The

punch has a stroke of 95 mm. Find the power of the

motor required if the mean speed of the fly wheel is 20

m/s. If total fluctuation of speed is ot to exceed 3% of the

mean speed. Determine the mass of the fly wheel

Understand b

5

A three cylinder single acting engine has its cranks set

equally at 120° and it runs at 600 r.p.m. The torque-

crank angle diagram for each cycle is a triangle for the

power stroke with a maximum torque of 90 N-m at 60°

from dead centre of corresponding crank. The torque on

the return stroke is sensibly zero. Determine : 1. power

developed. 2. coefficient of fluctuation of speed, if the

mass of the flywheel is 12 kg and has a radius of

gyration of 80 mm, 3. coefficient of fluctuation

of energy, and 4. maximum angular acceleration of the

flywheel

Evaluate e

6

A certain machine requires a torque of (5000 + 500 sin θ

) N-m to drive it, where θ is the angle of rotation of shaft

measured from certain datum. The machine is directly

coupled to an engine which produces a torque of (5000 +

600 sin 2θ) N-m. The flywheel and the other rotating

parts attached to the engine has a mass of 500 kg at a

radius of gyration of 0.4 m. If the mean speed is 150

r.p.m., find : 1. the fluctuation of energy, 2. the total

percentage fluctuation of speed, and 3. the maximum and

minimum angular acceleration of the flywheel and the

corresponding shaft position.

Understand b

7

A single cylinder double acting steam engine develops

150 kW at a mean speed of 80 r.p.m. The coefficient of

fluctuation of energy is 0.1 and the fluctuation of speed

is ± 2% of mean speed. If the mean diameter of the

flywheel rim is 2 metre and the hub and spokes provide

5% of the rotational inertia of the flywheel, find the mass

Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 115

and cross-sectional area of the flywheel rim. Assume the

density of the flywheel material (which is cast iron) as

7200 kg/m3.

8

A machine punching 38 mm holes in 32 mm thick plate

requires 7 N-m of energy per sq. mm of sheared area,

and punches one hole in every 10 seconds. Calculate the

power of the motor required. The mean speed of the

flywheel is 25 metres per second. The punch has a stroke

of 100 mm. Find the mass of the flywheel required, if the

total fluctuation of speed is not to exceed 3% of the

mean speed. Assume that the motor supplies energy to

the machine at uniform rate.

Remember a

9

A vertical double acting steam engine develops 75 kW at

250 r.p.m. The maximum fluctuation of energy is 30 per

cent of the work done per stroke. The maximum and

minimum speeds are not to vary more than 1 per cent on

either side of the mean speed. Find the mass of the

flywheel required, if the radius of gyration is 0.6 m.

Understand a

10

A single cylinder double acting steam engine delivers

185 kW at 100 r.p.m. The maximum fluctuation of

energy per revolution is 15 per cent of the energy

developed per revolution. The speed variation is limited

to 1 per cent either way from the mean. The mean

diameter of the rim is 2.4 m. Find the mass and cross-

sectional dimensions of the flywheel rim when width of

rim is twice the thickness. The density of flywheel

material is 7200 kg/m3

Understand b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Discuss how a single revolving mass is balanced by two

masses revolving in different planes. Remember a

2 Write a short note on primary and secondary balancing. Understand a

3

Derive the following expressions, for an uncoupled two

cylinder locomotive engine :

(a) Variation is tractive force ; (b) Swaying couple ; and

(c) Hammer blow.

Analysis b

4 Explain the method of balancing of different masses

revolving in the same plane. Understand b

5 Why is balancing of rotating parts necessary for high

speed engines ? Evaluate e

6 Explain clearly the terms ‘static balancing’ and ‘dynamic

balancing’. State the necessary conditions to achieve Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 116

them.

7 Discuss how a single revolving mass is balanced by two

masses revolving in same plane Remember a

8 Explain clearly ‘dynamic balancing’ Understand a

9 Derive the expressions for Swaying couple for an

uncoupled two cylinder locomotive engine Understand b

10 Write a short note on secondary balancing. Analysis b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

A Porter governor has equal arms each 250 mm long and

pivoted on the axis of rotation. Each ball has a mass of 5

kg and the mass of the central load on the sleeve is 25

kg. The radius of rotation of the ball is 150 mm when the

governor begins to lift and 200 mm when the governor is

at maximum speed. Find the minimum and maximum

speeds and range of speed of the governor.

Understand a

2

A loaded Porter governor has four links each 250 mm

long, two revolving masses each of 3 kg and a central

dead weight of mass 20 kg. All the links are attached to

respective sleeves at radial distances of 40 mm from the

axis of rotation. The masses revolve at a radius of 150

mm at minimum speed and at a radius of 200 mm at

maximum speed. Determine the range of speed.

Analysis b

3

A Proell governor has equal arms of length 300 mm. The

upper and lower ends of the arms are pivoted on the axis

of the governor. The extension arms of the lower links

are each 80 mm long and parallel to the axis when the

radii of rotation of the balls are 150 mm and 200 mm.

The mass of each ball is 10 kg and the mass of the

central load is 100 kg. Determine the range of speed of

the governor.

Understand b

4

A Hartnell governor having a central sleeve spring and

two right-angled bell crank levers moves between 290

r.p.m. and 310 r.p.m. for a sleeve lift of 15mm. The

sleeve arms and the ball arms are 80 mm and 120 mm

respectively. The levers are pivoted at 120 mm from the

governor axis and mass of each ball is 2.5 kg. The ball

arms are parallel to the governor axis at the lowest

equilibrium speed. Determine : 1. loads on the spring at

the lowest and the highest equilibrium speeds, and 2.

stiffness of the spring.

Understand a

5 The upper arms of a Porter governor has lengths 350 mm Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 117

and are pivoted on the axis of rotation. The lower arms

has lengths 300 mm and are attached to the sleeve at a

distance of 40 mm from the axis. Each ball has a mass of

4 kg and mass on the sleeve is 45 kg. Determine the

equilibrium speed for a radius of rotation of 200 mm and

find also the effort and power of the governor for 1 per

cent speed change.

6

The radius of rotation of the balls of a Hartnell governor

is 80 mm at the minimum speed of 300 r.p.m. Neglecting

gravity effect, determine the speed after the sleeve has

lifted by 60 mm. Also determine the initial compression

of the spring, the governor effort and the power. The

particulars of the governor are given below: Length of

ball arm = 150mm ; length of sleeve arm = 100mm ;

mass of each ball = 4 kg ; and stiffness of the spring = 25

N/mm.

Understand b

7

In a Porter governor, the mass of the central load is 18 kg

and the mass of each ball is 2 kg. The top arms are 250

mm while the bottom arms are each 300 mm long. The

friction of the sleeve is 14 N. If the top arms make 45°

with the axis of rotation in the equilibrium position, find

the range of speed of the governor in that position.

Remember a

8

A spring controlled governor of the Hartnell type with a

central spring under compression has balls each of mass

2 kg. The ball and sleeve arms of the bell crank levers

are respectively 100 mm and 60 mm long and are at right

angles. In the lowest position of the governor sleeve, the

radius of rotation of the balls is 80 mm and the ball arms

are parallel to the governor axis. Find the initial load on

the spring in order that the sleeve may begin to lift at 300

r.p.m. If the stiffness of the spring is 30 kN/m, what is

the equilibrium speed corresponding to a sleeve lift of 10

mm?

Understand a

9

The spring controlled governor of the Hartung type has

two rotating masses each of 2.5 kg and the limits of their

radius of rotation are 100 mm and 125 mm. The each

mass is directly controlled by a spring attached to it and

to the inner casing of the governor as shown in Fig 18.26

(a). The stiffness of the spring is 8 kN/m and the force

on each spring, when the masses are in their mid-

position, is 320 N. In addition, there is an equivalent

constant inward radial force of 80 N acting on each

revolving mass in order to allow for the dead weight of

the mechanism. Neglecting friction, find the range of

speed of

the governor.

Evaluate e

10 In a spring controlled governor, the radial force acting on

the balls was 4500 N when the centre of balls was 200 Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 118

mm from the axis and 7500 N when at 300 mm.

Assuming that the force varies directly as the radius, find

the radius of the ball path when the governor runs at 270

r.p.m. Also find what alteration in spring load is required

in order to make the governor isochronous and the speed

at which it would then run. The mass of each ball is 30

kg.

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Discuss the effect of inertia of the shaft in longitudinal

and transverse vibrations Understand a

2

Deduce an expression for the natural frequency of free

transverse vibrations for a beam fixed at both ends and

carrying a uniformly distributed mass of m kg per unit

length.

Analysis b

3 Explain the terms ‘under damping, critical damping’ and

‘over damping’ Understand b

4 Establish an expression for the amplitude of forced

vibrations Understand a

5 What do you understand by transmissibility ? Analysis b

6 Explain the term ‘dynamic magnifier’. Understand b

7 Discuss the effect of inertia of the shaft in longitudinal

and transverse vibrations Evaluate e

8 Explain the term ‘whirling speed’ or ‘critical speed’ of a

shaft. Remember a

9 Discuss briefly with neat sketches the longitudinal,

transverse and torsional free vibrations. Understand a

10 Explain the terms ‘under damping, critical damping’ and

‘over damping’ Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 119

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

An inside cylinder locomotive has its cylinder centre

lines 0.7 m apart and has a stroke of 0.6 m. The rotating

masses per cylinder are equivalent to 150 kg at the

crank pin, and the reciprocating masses per cylinder to

180 kg. The wheel centre lines are 1.5 m apart. The

cranks are at right angles. The whole of the rotating and

2/3 of the reciprocating masses are to be balanced by

masses placed at a radius of 0.6 m. Find the magnitude

and direction of the balancing masses. Find the

fluctuation in rail pressure under one wheel, variation

of tractive effort and the magnitude of swaying couple

at a crank speed of 300 r.p.m.

Understand a

2

A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm

long. The planes of rotation of the first, second and

fourth cranks are 400 mm, 200 mm and 200 mm

respectively from the third crank and their reciprocating

masses are 50 kg, 60 kg and 50 kg respectively. Find

the mass of the reciprocating parts for the third cylinder

and the relative angular positions of the cranks in order

that the engine may be in complete primary balance.

Analysis b

3

The following data apply to an outside cylinder

uncoupled locomotive : Mass of rotating parts per

cylinder = 360 kg ; Mass of reciprocating parts per

cylinder = 300 kg ; Angle between cranks = 90° ; Crank

radius = 0.3 m ; Cylinder centres = 1.75 m ; Radius of

balance masses = 0.75 m ; Wheel centres = 1.45 m. If

whole of the rotating and two-thirds of reciprocating

parts are to be balanced in planes of the driving wheels,

find : 1. Magnitude and angular positions of balance

masses, 2. Speed in kilometres per hour at which the

wheel will lift off the rails when the load on each

driving wheel is 30 kN and the diameter of tread of

driving wheels is 1.8 m.

Understand b

4

A four cylinder vertical engine has cranks 150 mm

long. The planes of rotation of the first, second and

fourth cranks are 400 mm, 200 mm and 200 mm

respectively from the third crank and their reciprocating

masses are 50 kg, 60 kg and 50 kg respectively. Find

the mass of the reciprocating parts for the third cylinder

and the relative angular positions of the cranks in order

Remember a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 120

that the engine may be in complete primary balance.

5

A five cylinder in-line engine running at 750 r.p.m. has

successive cranks 144° apart, the distance between the

cylinder centre lines being 375 mm. The piston stroke is

225 mm and the ratio of the connecting rod to the crank

is 4. Examine the engine for balance of primary and

secondary forces and couples. Find the maximum

values of these and the position of the central crank at

which these maximum values occur. The mass for each

cylinder is 15 kg.

Understand a

6

The three cylinders of an air compressor have their axes

120° to one another, and their connecting rods are

coupled to a single crank. The stroke is 100 mm and the

length of each connecting rod is 150 mm. The mass of

the reciprocating parts per cylinder is 1.5 kg. Find the

maximum primary and secondary forces acting on the

frame of the compressor when running at 3000 r.p.m.

Describe clearly a method by which such forces may be

balanced.

Evaluate e

7

A shaft carries five masses A, B, C, D and E which

revolve at the same radius in planes which are

equidistant from one another. The magnitude of the

masses in planes A, C and D are 50 kg, 40 kg and 80 kg

respectively. The angle between A and C is 90° and that

between C and D is 135°.Determine the magnitude of

the masses in planes B and E and their positions to put

the shaft in

complete rotating balance.

Understand a

8

A, B, C and D are four masses carried by a rotating

shaft at radii 100 mm, 150 mm, 150 mm and

200 mm respectively. The planes in which the masses

rotate are spaced at 500 mm apart and the

magnitude of the masses B, C and D are 9 kg, 5 kg and

4 kg respectively. Find the required mass A

and the relative angular settings of the four masses so

that the shaft shall be in complete balance.

Analysis b

9

A single cylinder engine runs at 250 r.p.m. and has a

stroke of 180 mm. The reciprocating parts has a mass of

120 kg and the revolving parts are equivalent to a mass

of 70 kg at a radius of 90 mm. A mass is placed

opposite to the crank at a radius of 150 mm to balance

the whole of the revolving mass and two-thirds of the

reciprocating mass. Determine the magnitude of the

balancing mass and the resultant residual unbalance

force when the crank has turned 30° from the inner

dead centre,

neglect the obliquity of the connecting rod.

Understand b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 121

10

A four cylinder inline marine oil engine has cranks at

angular displacement of 90°. The outer

cranks are 3 m apart and inner cranks are 1.2 m apart.

The inner cranks are placed symmetrically

between the outer cranks. The length of each crank is

450 mm. If the engine runs at 90 r.p.m. and

the mass of reciprocating parts for each cylinder is 900

kg, find the firing order of the cylinders for

the best primary balancing force of reciprocating

masses. Determine the maximum unbalanced primary

couple for the best arrangement.

Understand a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 122

12.0 MACHINE TOOLS (A50321)

12.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A50321

Course Title MACHINE TOOLS

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

5 1 - 4

Course Coordinator P.Subramanyam, Asst.Professor

Team of Instructors G.Hima Bindu, Patan Rahim Khan

COURSE OVERVIEW:

At the very outset of engineering development materials were cut by means of simple hand

tools. Gradually, with the development of civilization and engineering, work done by hand

tools give way to the work performed by special machines which are called machine tools.

Hand tools are tools which are held and used by the hands for shaping and sizing a work

and there is no mechanism in them. The cutting away of the excess metal in the form of

chips or small pieces is simply done by the muscular efforts of man. As a result, the process

is time consuming and not give satisfactory surface finish. It includes files, saw, chisel,

scrapper, etc. which are very commonly used in bench and fitting works and assembly of

machines.

12.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4

Engineering Workshop, Production

Technology, Metallurgy & Materials

Science

12.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each

question carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination

75 100

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 123

shall be conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5

units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid.

The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average

of the two midterm examinations shall be taken as the

final marks secured by each candidate.

12.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

1. To introduce students to the basic concepts of manufacturing via shaping, forming,

machining, CNC machining and assembly. To introduce students conventional

manufacturing processes.

2. To develop a knowledge of appropriate parameters to be used for various machining

operations.

3. To develop a knowledge of workshop practice and basic use of machine tools and

workshop equipment.

4. To introduce students to the role of manufacturing in an economy and to show the

relationship between design and manufacturing.

5. To make students aware of the necessity to manage manufacturing processes and

systems for the best use of material and human resources with particular emphasis on

product safety and environmental considerations.

6. To introduce students to the scientific principles underlying material behavior during

manufacturing processes so as to enable them to undertake calculations of forces, tool

stresses and material removal rates.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 124

12.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

1. An ability to understand the basic parameters in the metal cutting operation.

2. An Ability to Calculate analytically the forces and other parameter associated with

orthogonal cutting.

3. An Ability To Know the various cutting fluids and their application methods.

4. An ability To Understand the importance of lathe ,its many varieties and basic

structure of center lathe.

5. An ability to Understands operation of shaper, slotter , planer and drilling machine.

6. An ability To Know the various types of milling machine ,grinding machine, boring

machines and their application and their operations.

12.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing,

mathematical foundations, algorithmic principles, and

computer science and engineering theory in the

modeling and design of computer-based systems to real-

world problems (fundamental engineering analysis

skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

b

An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as

to analyze and interpret data (information retrieval

skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

c

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a

computer-based system, process, component, or

program to meet desired needs, within realistic

constraints such as economic, environmental, social,

political, health and safety, manufacturability, and

sustainability (Creative Skills)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary

teams (team work) N --

e

An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and

use the appropriate computing and engineering

requirements for obtaining its solution (engineering

problem solving skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 125

f

An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security

and social

issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)

N --

g

An ability to communicate effectively both in writing

and orally

(speaking / writing skills)

N --

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and

global impact of computing and engineering solutions

on individuals, organizations, and society (engineering

impact assessment skills)

N --

i

Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

continuing

professional development and life-long learning

(continuing

education awareness)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

j A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social

awareness) N --

k

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools

necessary for

computing and engineering practice (practical

engineering analysis

skills)

N --

l

An ability to apply design and development principles

in the construction of software and hardware systems of

varying complexity (software hardware interface)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional

development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face

competitive examinations that offer challenging and

rewarding careers in computing (successful career and

immediate employment).

N --

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 126

12.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS:

UNIT – I Elementary treatment of metal cutting theory – Element of cutting process –

Geometry of single point tool and angles chip formation and types of chips – built up

edge and its effects chip breakers. Mechanics of orthogonal cutting – Merchant’s Force

diagram, cutting forces – cutting speeds, feed, depth of cut, tool life, coolants, mach

inability – Tool materials.

UNIT – II Engine lathe – Principle of working, specification of lathe – types of lathe –

work & tool holding devices-Taper turning thread, turning – for Lathes and attachments.

Turret and capstan lathes – Principal features of automatic lathes – classification – Single

spindle and multi-spindle automatic lathes – tool layout

UNIT – III Shaping slotting and planing machines – Principles of working – Principal

parts – specification classification, operations performed. Kinematic scheme of the

shaping slotting and planning machines, machining time calculations.

Drilling and Boring Machines – Principles of working, specifications, types,

operations performed – tool holding devices – twist drill – Boring machines – Fine

boring machines – Jig Boring machine. Deep hole drilling machine. Kinematics

scheme of the drilling and boring machines

UNIT – IV Milling machine – Principles of working – specifications – classifications of

milling machines – Principal features of horizontal, vertical and universal milling

machines – machining operations Types geometry of milling cutters – milling cutters –

methods of indexing – Accessories to milling machines, kinematic scheme of milling

cutters – milling cutters – methods of indexing. Lapping, honing and broaching machines

– comparison to grinding – lapping and honing. Kinematics scheme of Lapping, Honing

and Broaching machines. Constructional features of speed and feed Units, machining

time calculations

UNIT –V Grinding machine – Fundamentals – Theory of grinding – classification of

grinding machine – cylindrical and surface grinding machine – Tool and cutter grinding

machine special types of grinding machines – Different types of abrasives – bonds

specification of a grinding wheel and selection of a grinding wheel Kinematic scheme of

grinding machines.

Text Books:

T1. Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta.

T2. Production Technology by H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).

Reference Books:

R1. Machine Tools – C.Elanchezhian and M. Vijayan / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.

R2.Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II

R3. Principles of machine Tools/ Bhattacharya A and Sen.G.C./New central Book

Agency.

R4. Elements of Work Shop Technology- Vol-II/ Hajra chowdary/Media prometers.

R5. Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine tools/ Geofrey Boothroyd/McGraw

Hill.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 127

12.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning

Outcomes.

Lecture.

No.

Course Learning

Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference

1

What is the main role of

machine tools in modern

industry?

Introduction, Importance of

machine tools in the modern

industry T1&R1

2 Describe the methods of

metal cutting . Methods of metal cutting T1&R1

3

What is the main

Elements used in

machining process

Elements of machining process T1&R1

4

State the Differences

between orthogonal and

oblique cutting

Differences between orthogonal

and oblique cutting T1&R1

5 Explain difference

types cutting tools Classification of cutting tools T1&R1

6 Illustrate Geometry of

single point cutting tool.

Nomenclature of single point

cutting tool(Angles) T1&R1

7 Explain chip formation

types and their effects. Chip formation mechanism T2&R1

8 Explain difference types

of their effects.

Types of chips (Build up edge),

Tool failure, Chip breakers, T2&R1

9

Calculate tool life &

ORS System.

Tool life , Coolants or cutting

fluids, Mechanics of metal

cutting(Orthogonal cutting) T2&R1

10

Calculate Cutting

speed, feed and Tool

life.

Cutting Parameters ( Cutting

speed, feed, and depth of cut)

T2&R1

11 Evaluate kinematic

scheme of Lathe

Machinability, Cutting Tool

Material, T2&R1

12 Analyze the Merchant

force diagram.

Merchant force diagram(Cutting

force diagram) T2&R1

13

Calculate Cutting

speed, feed and Tool

life.

Constructional features of speed &

feed gear box. Kinematics of

Machine Tools, T2&R1

14 Describe the operation

of engine Lathe.

Engine lathe-principle of working,

specification of lathe, Operations T2&R1

15

Explain difference types

work holders & tool

holders.

Types of lathe, work holders, tool

holders.

16

Illustrate Geometry of

Box tools, taper turning,

threading –for lathes.

Box tools, taper turning, threading

–for lathes. T2 & R1

17 Categorize & Describe Lathe attachments. T2 & R1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 128

lathe lathe attachments

18

Describe the operation

Turret and Capstan

lathes,

Turret and Capstan lathes, T2 & R1

19

Categorize & Describe the work holders and

tool holders.

Work Holding Devices(Collet

chucks, other work holders), tool

holding devices. T2 & R1

20 Explain the Turret and

Capstan lathes, Box and tool lay out. T2 & R1

21

Describe the Box and

tool lay out for

Automatic lathe.

Principle features of automatic

lathes-classification. T2 & R1

22

Describe the Operations

of Turret & Capstan

lathe.

Single spindle and multi spindle

automatic lathes, Tool lay out T2 & R1

23 Evaluate kinematic

scheme of Lathe Kinematic scheme of lathes, T2 & R1

24 Describe the shaping,

planning, slotting

Introduction to shaping, planning,

slotting T2 & R1

25

State the principle of

shaping, planning,

slotting

Principle of working to shaping,

planning, slotting T1 & T2

26 Categorize or Types of

shaper Classification or Types of shaper T1 & T2

27 State the principle of

shaping

Principle parts of shaper (Parts of

shaper) T1 & T2

28 State the Specification

of shaping specifications

T1 & T2

29 Describe the operation

of Shaping machine. Shaper operations

T1 & T2

30

Evaluate kinematic

scheme of Shaping,

slotting and planning

machine.

Kinematic schemes of shaping,

slotting, machines, planning

machines.

T1 & T2

31

State the machine

Machining time

calculations,

Machining time calculations, T1 & T2

32 Describe the Drilling

machine .

Introduction of Drilling machine-

principle, T1 & T2

33 State the Specification

of shaping, Specification of Drilling Machine

T1 & T2

34 Describe the operation

of Drilling Machine. Drilling M/C operations

T1 & T2

35

Categorize & Describe tool holding devices of

drilling.

Tool holding devices of drilling

machine T1 & T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 129

36 Explain difference

types of drills Types of drills ( Twist drill.)

T1 & T2

37 Describe the operation

of Boring Machine. Boring Machine Operations T1&T2

38

Describe the Fine

boring machine, jig

boring machine .

Fine boring machine, jig boring

machine T1&T2

39 Evaluate kinematic

scheme of Drilling

Kinematic schemes of drilling,

boring machines T1&T2

40 State the principle of

milling machine. Milling machine-principle, T1&T2

41 State the Specification

of milling Specification, classification. T1&T2

42

Describe the

Horizontal milling

machine

Horizontal milling machine T1&T2

43 Describe the Vertical

milling machine Vertical milling machine T1&T2

44

Describe the

Universal milling

machine

Universal milling machine T1&T2

45 Illustrate Geometry of

milling cutters, Geometry of milling cutters, T1&T2

46 Describe the Milling

operations . Milling operations T1&T2

47

Categorize & Describe Milling Attachment

(Accessories of milling

machine).

Milling Attachment (Accessories

of milling machine). T1&T2

48 Describe attachment

methods of indexing Methods of indexing R1

49 Evaluate kinematic

scheme of Milling.

Kinematic scheme of milling

cutters. R1

50 Describe the operation

of grinding,. Introduction to grinding, R1

51 Categorize Theory of

grinding. Theory of grinding. R1

52 Explain difference types

of grinding machines.

Classifications of grinding

machines. R1

53

Describe the

Cylindrical and surface

grinding machines

Cylindrical and surface grinding

machines R1

54 Explain Tool and cutter

grinding machine. Tool and cutter grinding machine. R1

55

Explain the Special

types of grinding

machines.

Special types of grinding

machines.

Types of abrasives, bonds. T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 130

T1. Production Technology by R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta.

T2. Production Technology by H.M.T. (Hindustan Machine Tools).

R1. Machine Tools – C.Elanchezhian and M. Vijayan / Anuradha Agencies Publishers.

R2.Workshop Technology – B.S.Raghu Vamshi – Vol II

R3. Principles of machine Tools/ Bhattacharya A and Sen.G.C./New central Book

Agency.

R4. Elements of Work Shop Technology- Vol-II/ Hajra chowdary/Media prometers.

R5. Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine tools/ Geofrey Boothroyd/McGraw

Hill.

12.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

I H S

II H

III H S

IV H S

V S S

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

56

Categorize the bonds

Specification of grinding

wheel.

Bonds Specification of grinding

wheel. T2

57 How to selection of

grinding wheel

Selection of wheel, Kinematic

scheme of grinding machine. T2

58 Describe the Lapping,

honing, broaching.

Introduction to Lapping, honing,

broaching. T2

59

Differentiate the

grinding, lapping,

honing.

Comparison of grinding, lapping,

honing. T2

60

Evaluate kinematic

scheme of lapping,

honing, broaching

machines..

Kinematic schemes of lapping,

honing, broaching machines. T2

61

State the machine

Machining time

calculations

Constructional features of speed,

Feed units. Machining time

calculations, T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 131

12.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes

a b c d e f g h i j k l m

1 H H

2 H S H

3 H S H

4 S H

5 H H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

12.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1. A built –up-edge is formed while machining [ B ]

a) Ductile materials at high speed

b)Ductile materials at low speed

c)Brittle materials at high speeds

d)Brittle materials at low speeds

2. A single point tool has the following specifications in ASA system 8, 7, 5, 6, 10, 9, 1.5

The number 1.5represents [ D ]

a)Bake rake angle

b)End relief angle

c)Side relief angle

d)Nose radius

3. Tool signature means [ B ]

a) The impression of the tool taken on a paper for any reference

b) A numerical method of identification of tool

c) The plan of tool

d) The signature of operator using the tool

4. According to ASA a tool signature is given as 10, 10, 6, 6, 8, 8, 2. The number 6 indicates [ C ]

a) Rake Angle

b) Cutting Edge Angle

c) Relief Angle

d) Nose Radius

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 132

5. Discontinuous chips will be formed when machining speed is [ B ]

a) High

b) Low

c) Medium

d) Away from the design value

6. Machinability of a metal is determined by [ A ]

a) Machinability Index

b) Maximum possible cutting speed

c) Maximum possible depth of cut

d) Maximum surface finish per cut

7. Recognize the metal cutting element [ B ]

a) Feed

b) Tool Holding Device

c) Depth of cut

d) Speed

8. In orthogonal cutting system, cutting edge is [ B ]

a) In line with direction of tool travel

b) Perpendicular to direction of tool travel

c) Perpendicular to shear plane

d) At 300 to the cutting plane

9. The spindle speeds of machine tools are usually designed to follow: [ B ]

a)Arithmetic progressiob) Geometric progression

c) Harmonic progression

d) Logarithmic progression

10. The primary clearance angle in milling cutter provided for Aluminum, Brass etc. is of

the order [ A ]

a) 10 – 12

b) 1 – 2

c) 5 – 10

d) 4 – 7

11. The cutting speed is Maximum while machining -------------with high speed steel tool.

[ D ]

a) Cast Iron

b) Mild steel

c) Brass

d) Aluminium

12. The width of cutting edge of parting tool varies from-------- [ A ]

a) 3 – 12mm

b) 5 – 20mm

c) 8 – 30mm

d) 15 – 40mm

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 133

13. Cutting fluids mostly used for machining steel is ----------------- [ B ]

a) Water

b) Soluble oil

c) Dry

d) Heavy oil

14. When cutting face of tool is 900 to the line of action of tool then it is known as -[ B ]

a) Oblique cutting

b) Orthogonal cutting

c) ASA System

d) ORS System

15. Work done in metal cutting is depends on ---------------------- [ A ]

a) Cutting force & Cutting speed

b) Cutting speed & heat generated

c) Depth of cut & cutting speed

d)Depth of Cut & Cutting Force

16. -------------Gives best finish [ C ]

a) Lower cutting speed & higher feed

b) Higher cutting speed & higher feed

c) Higher cutting speed & fine feed

d) All the above

17. As the cutting speed increases tool cutting forces---------------- [ C ]

a) Remains constant

b) Increases

c) decreases

d)None

18. Larger end cutting edge angle --------------Tool life [ A ]

a) Increases

b) decreases

c) No effect

d)all the above

19. ------------are most commonly used for measuring force in metal cutting [ A ]

a) Mechanical & Strain gauge dynamometer

b) Calorimeter

c) Wattmeter

d)Ammeter

20. Surface which face the work piece is known as--------------of the tool [ A ]

a) Flank

b) Heel

c) Base

d) Top Angle

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 134

UNIT-II

1. Capstan and turret lathes are usually used [ D ]

a) To make small components

b) To make large components

c) For ordinary work

d) For mass production

2. Which of the following is not used as work holding device [ D ]

a) Chuck

b) Angle plate

c) Face plate

d) Carriage

3. The lathe that can accommodate maximum number of tools is [ D ]

a) Engine lathe

b) Tool room lathe

c) Copy lathe

d) Capstan and Turret lathe

4. Tail stock set over method of taper Turning is preferred for [ C ]

a) Internal tapers

b) small tapers

c) long slender tapers

d)step tapers

5. Half nut mechanism is employed while performing __________ operation in lathe [ C ]

a) Under cutting

b) plain turning

c)thread cutting

d)taper turning

6. Which the following is lathe accessory [ C ]

a) Head stock

b) compound rest

c) lathe carrier

d) tool post

7. Enlarging an existing hole with a rotating single point tool is called [ A ]

a) boring

b) drilling

c) reaming

d) internal turning

8. The lathe spindle is generally provided with a taper of [ D ]

a) 1 in 5

b) 1 in 10

c) 1 in 15

d) 1 in 20

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 135

9. Generally lathe tool is made of ______________ steel [ D ]

a) Iron

b) Aluminum

c) Cast Iron

d) High Speed Steel

10. The lathe with 15 cm center height would have a swing over the bed as [ A ]

a) 30cm

b) 15cm

c) 45 cm

d) 60 cm

10. The lathe with 15 cm center height would have a swing over the bed as [ A ]

a) 30cm

b) 15cm

c) 45 cm

d) 60 cm

11. Which operations are performed in lathe [ D ]

a) Undercut

b) Threading

c) Facing

d) All of These

12. Lathe bed is made of [ D ]

a) Wood

b) Steels

c) Plastic

d) Cast Iron

13. The movement of the cutting tool in lathe is [ B ]

a) Static

b) Moved

c) Not necessary

d) All of these

14. Most of the cases lathe is preferred to machining of [ B ]

a) Square

b) Cylindrical

c) Rectangular

d) Any Shape

15. In lathe the tool post is arranged in _________side [ A ]

a) Above

b) Below

c) Right side

d) Left side

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 136

16. Short work piece is hold in [ A ]

a) Chuck

b) Tail Stock

c) Carriage

d) Lathe bed

17. Between center are used in lathe for ________Work [ C ]

a) Cutting

b) Shaping

c) Holding

d) All of these

18. For capstan and turret lathes turret head is used or not. [ A ]

a) Yes

b) No

c) May be

d) All of these

19. Steady Rest is also called [ B ]

a) Head stroke

b) Centre Rest

c) Chuck

d) Tool Post

20. Lathe dogs are made up of [ C ]

a) Wood

b) Plastics

c) Metal

d) Non of above.

UNIT-III

1. Reciprocation of the cutting tool in shaping machines is accomplished by [ D ]

a. Rack pinion mechanism

b. Crank and connecting rod mechanism

c. Cam and cam follower mechanism

d. Oscillating lever mechanism

2. Internal keyway in gears can be cut in [ C ]

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. Slotting machine

d. None of the above

3. The job reciprocates in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. slotting machine

d. All of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 137

4. The T-slots in the table of planing machines are cut in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. Slotting machine

d. None of the above

5. Flat surface can be produced in [ D ]

a. Shaping machine only

b. Planing machine only

c. Slotting machine only

d. All of the above

6. Large number of cutting tool [ B ]

s can be simultaneously used in

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. Slotting machine

d. None of the above

7. Heavy cuts can be given during machining in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. Slotting machine

d. None of the above

8. Slotting machines are used to cut internal gear teeth for [ A ]

a. Batch production

b. Lot production

c. Mass production

d. None of the above

9. The work-table can rotate in [ C ]

a. Shaping machine

b. Planing machine

c. Slotting machine

d. None of the above

10. Length of the stroke can be varied in [ B ]

a. Shaping machine

b). Planing machine

c). Slotting machine

d). All of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 138

11. The table in a slotter is a [ B ]

a) Square Table

b) Circular Table

c) Rectangular Table

d) Semi – circular Table

12. Normally shaping machine is used for producing [ C ]

a) Threads

b) Cylindrical surfaces

c) Surfaces composed of straight line elements

d) Cylindrical holes.

13. In a planer [ D ]

a) The tool is rotated

b) The tool is reciprocated

c) The job is rotated

d) The job is reciprocated

14. Size of a shaper is given by [ A ]

a) stroke length

b) motor power

c)weight of machine

d)table size

15. In a mechanical shaper the lifting of the tool during idle stroke is ensured by [ D ]

a) tool head

b) ratchet and pow mechanism

c) ram adjustment

d)clamper box mechanism

16. If the speed of Forward Stroke in a shaper is 12 m/min, the speed of Backward Stroke

should be [ C ]

a) 6 or 15 m/min

b) 12 m/min

c) 8 or 18 m/min

d) 6 or 24 m/min

17. Drill bushes are made up of [ D ]

a) High Speed Steel

b) Aluminum

c) Low carbon steels

d) High Carbon Steels, hardened and ground

18. Drill bushes are made up of [ B ]

a) High Speed Steel

b) Aluminum

c) Low carbon steels

d) High Carbon Steels, hardened and ground

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 139

19. Drill chucks are used for holding

[ B ]

a) Taper shank drills

b) Straight shank drills

c) Hexagonal shank drills

d) Square shank drills

20. In reaming process [ C ]

a) Metal removal rate is high

b) position of drilled hole is corrected

c) high form accuracy is obtained

d) high dimensional accuracy is obtained

UNIT-IV

1. In a milling operation, two side milling cutters are mounted with a desired distance between them

so that both sides of a wok piece can be milled simultaneously. This set up is called

(a) Gang milling

(b) straddle milling

(c) Side milling

(d) slab milling [ B ]

2. A milling cutter having 8teeth is rotating at 150 rpm. If feed per tooth is 0.1mm,the value of the

table speed in mm/minis [ A ]

(a) 120

(b) 187

(c) 125

(d) 70

3. Indexing is applied to ______________ machines [ A ]

(a) milling

(b) grinding

(c) lapping

(d) honing

4. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling cutter is called

a) Lip Angle b) Rake Angle c) Cutting Angle d) Chisel Edge Angle [ A ]

5. Standard taper generally used on milling machine is [ B ]

a) Morse

b) Brown and Sharpe

c) Chapman

d) Seller's

6. In a milling cutter, the angle between the land of a tooth and the tangent to the outside diameter

of he cutter at the cutting edge of the tooth is called [ C ]

a) Lip Angle

b) Rake Angle

c) Relief Angle

d) Chisel Edge Angle

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 140

7. The arbor of the milling machine is used to hold [ A ]

a) Cutting tool

b) Spindle

c) Over arm

d) Mandrel

8. Feed rate in milling operation is expressed as [ A ]

a) mm/tooth

b) mm/rpm of the milling cutter

c) meters/minute

d) Revolution per minute.

9. Very thin chips with end mills [ A ]

a) Dull the cutting edge quickly

b) Improve tool life

c) Sharpen the cutting edge

d) Cause chipping of the cutting

10. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling

cutter is called …….. [ B ]

a)Rake angle

b) Lip Angle

c)Cutting angle

d)Nose angle

11. The surface finish obtained in broaching operation is of the order of [ B ]

(a) 8 micron

(b)0.8 micron

(c) 0.08 micron

(d) 0.008 micron

12. The maximum depth of cut which the tooth of a broach cuts is [ B ]

(a) I mm (b) 0.15 nim (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.5 mm

13. A broach has

(a) roughing teeth, semifinishing teeth and finishing teeth [ A ]

(b) roughing teeth and finishing teeth

(c) only finishing teeth

(d)Non of above

14. The pitch for teeth of internal brooches is given by the relation: [ B ]

(a) 0.35 times length of cut in mm.

(b) 1.25 to 1.5 times length of cut in mm

(c) 4 times length of cut in mm

(d) None of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 141

15. For proper broaching. at least the following number of teeth should be in the work at a time

[ C ]

(a) 1

(b) 2

(c) 3

(d) 0

16. Choose the wrong statement: In broaching [ B ]

(a) the job is completed in one stroke of the machine

(b) the tooling WU is low

(c) the rate of production is high

(d)Non of above

17. The finishing teeth of a broaching tool are provided with [ B ]

(a) large amount of land

(b) smaller amount of land

(c) no land

(d)Non of above

18. The range of hardness of the material which can be broached is [ B ]

(a) 10 to 20 Rockwell C

(b) 25 to 40 Rockwell C

(c) 60 to 80 Rockwell C

(d)Non of above

19. Broaching is primarily done for [ C ]

(a) better finish

(b) cylindrical jobs

(c) mass production

(d) hard materials

20. The broaching operation in which the tool moves past the stationary work is[ D ]

(a) push broaching

(b) pull broaching

(c) continuous broaching

(d) surface broaching I

UNIT-V

1. In a milling operation, two side milling cutters are mounted with a desired distance between them

so that both sides of a wok piece can be milled simultaneously. This set up is called

(a) Gang milling

(b) straddle milling

(c) Side milling

(d) slab milling [ B ]

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 142

2. A milling cutter having 8teeth is rotating at 150 rpm. If feed per tooth is 0.1mm,the value of the

table speed in mm/minis [ A ]

(a) 120

(b) 187

(c) 125

(d) 70

3. Indexing is applied to ______________ machines [ A ]

(a) milling

(b) grinding

(c) lapping

(d) honing

4. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling cutter is called

a) Lip Angle

b) Rake Angle

c) Cutting Angle

d) Chisel Edge Angle [ A ]

5. Standard taper generally used on milling machine is [ B ]

a) Morse

b) Brown and Sharpe

c) Chapman

d) Seller's

6. In a milling cutter, the angle between the land of a tooth and the tangent to the outside diameter

of the cutter at the cutting edge of the tooth is called [ C ]

a) Lip Angle

b) Rake Angle

c) Relief Angle

d) Chisel Edge Angle

7. The arbor of the milling machine is used to hold [ A ]

a) Cutting tool

b) Spindle

c) Over arm

d) Mandrel

8. Feed rate in milling operation is expressed as [ A ]

a) mm/tooth

b) mm/rpm of the milling cutter

c) meters/minute

d) Revolution per minute.

9. Very thin chips with end mills [ A ]

a) Dull the cutting edge quickly

b) Improve tool life

c) Sharpen the cutting edge

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 143

d) Cause chipping of the cutting

10. The angle included between the land and the face of the tooth of a milling

cutter is called …….. [ B ]

a)Rake angle

b) Lip Angle

c)Cutting angle

d)Nose angle

11. The surface finish obtained in broaching operation is of the order of [ B ]

(a) 8 micron

(b)0.8 micron

(c) 0.08 micron

(d) 0.008 micron

12. The maximum depth of cut which the tooth of a broach cuts is [ B ]

(a) I mm

(b) 0.15 nim

(c) 0.01 mm

(d) 0.5 mm

13. A broach has

(a) roughing teeth, semifinishing teeth and finishing teeth [ A ]

(b) roughing teeth and finishing teeth

(c) only finishing teeth

(d)Non of above

14. The pitch for teeth of internal brooches is given by the relation: [ B ]

(a) 0.35 times length of cut in mm.

(b) 1.25 to 1.5 times length of cut in mm

(c) 4 times length of cut in mm

(d) None of the above

15. For proper broaching. at least the following number of teeth should be in the

work at a time. [ C ]

(a) 1

(b) 2

(c) 3

(d)0

16. Choose the wrong statement: In broaching [ B ]

(a) the job is completed in one stroke of the machine

(b) the tooling WU is low

(c) the rate of production is high

(d)Non of above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 144

7. The finishing teeth of a broaching tool are provided with [ B ]

(a) large amount of land

(b) smaller amount of land

(c) no land

(d)Non of above

18. The range of hardness of the material which can be broached is [ B ]

(a) 10 to 20 Rockwell C

(b) 25 to 40 Rockwell C

(c) 60 to 80 Rockwell C

(d)Non of above

19. Broaching is primarily done for [ C ]

(a) better finish

(b) cylindrical jobs

(c) mass production

(d) hard materials

20. The broaching operation in which the tool moves past the stationary work is[ D ]

(a) push broaching

(b) pull broaching

(c) continuous broaching

(d) surface broaching

12. 12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1

What are the types of tool materials used in metal

cutting? Discuss their

importance.

Knowledge a

2 What are the different types of chips? Explain

Machinability. Knowledge b

3 Explain the effect of cutting fluids on chip

contraction. Analysis e

4 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal

cutting. comprehension c

5 Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed

and tool life comprehension a

6 Define various angle of single point nomenclature Knowledge a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 145

with example?

7 Explain briefly about effects of cutting fluids while

during metal cutting? Knowledge a

8 Distinguish between ASA and ORS systems? Analysis a

9 How to identify the tool life? Analysis a

10 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Knowledge b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal

cutting. Knowledge a

2 What are the types of tool materials used in metal

cutting? Discuss their importance. Knowledge a

3 With the help of neat sketch, explain the tool

geometry. Analysis a

4 Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed

and tool life. comprehension b

5 What are the different types of chips? Explain

Machinability. comprehension a

6

Explain the following types of cutting fluids: i. Water

based cutting fluids ii. Straight or neat oil based

cutting fluids.

Knowledge b

7 Explain the effect of cutting fluids on chip

contraction. Knowledge e

8 Explain the factors used for judging the

Machinability. Analysis c

9 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal

cutting. Analysis a

10 What are the types of tool materials used in metal

cutting? Discuss their importance. Knowledge a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 146

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 List out various types of lathes? Analysis b

2 State the differences between engine lathe and centre

lathe? comprehension a

3 Explain the four types of operations that need to lathe

machining? comprehension b

4 Differentiate the tool setup for face turning and plain

turning? Analysis e

5 Explain briefly about taper turning methods? Knowledge b

6 Discuss the various tool holding devices for lathe? comprehension a

7 List out the two mandrel? Analysis b

8 Define lathe dogs? Explain how it is used to lathe? Knowledge e

9 Discuss the lathe carriers? And its applications. Knowledge a

10 Write the full classification of lathe? Knowledge a

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with

diagram . Analysis b

2 Name any six work-holding devices and explain

briefly. comprehension a

3 Draw the sketch of capstan lathe mention parts. comprehension b

4 Compare an engine lathe with capstan and turret

lathe. Analysis e

5 Explain six operations for lathe: Knowledge b

6 What are the chief distinguishing features of a turret

lathe as compared to an engine lathe? comprehension b

7 What is meant by ‘tool layout’ of a turret lathe? Analysis a

8 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a turret

lathe. Knowledge b

9 Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with

diagram . Knowledge e

10 Name any six work-holding devices and explain

briefly. Knowledge b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 147

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Short Answer Questions

1 How to classify the shaper? Knowledge b

2 Explain the following related operations to address the

tool: a. Horizontal Cutting b. Inclined Cutting Knowledge e

3 Explain the principle of slotting machine? Analysis b

4 Discuss advantages of disadvantages of shaper

operations over slotting operations? comprehension a

5 Explain the principle of slotting machine? comprehension b

6 Discuss advantages of disadvantages of shaper

operations over slotting operations? Knowledge e

7 Explain the following mechanism A. Whit-worth quick

return B. Crank and slotted lever Knowledge b

8 Explain the feed mechanism in shaper? Analysis e

9 Differentiate between mechanical shaper and hydraulic

shaper? Analysis b

10 6. Define the various work holding devices for shaper,

slotter and planer? Knowledge a

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Long Answer Questions

1 Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and

write about its important parts. Knowledge b

2 What are the main operations performed on a planer? Knowledge e

3 Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a

hydraulic shaper and explain. Analysis b

4 Write the planning machine working principle and its

applications. comprehension a

5 Sketch and explain the hydraulic drive of a horizontal

shaper. comprehension b

6

Name the common work-holding devices used on

shaper planers. With the help of a neat sketch, describe

a planer vice.

Knowledge b

7 Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a

hydraulic shaper and explain. Knowledge b

8 Write the planning machine working principle and its

applications. Analysis e

9 Explain any three methods of taper turning on a lathe. Analysis b

10 Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and

write about its important parts. Knowledge a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 148

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 What is a milling machine? How do you classify the

milling machine? Analysis b

2 Give the working principle of milling machine with a

neat sketch? comprehension e

3 Classifications of milling machines. comprehension b

4 Explain the importance of Universal milling machine Analysis a

5 Classifications of various milling cutters.? Knowledge b

6 What are the various milling operations? Explain with

the help of suitable sketches. comprehension b

7 Explain the following with neat sketches: Analysis e

8 Planer type milling machine. Knowledge b

9 Rotary table or continuous milling machine. Knowledge a

10 Mention the size and specification of milling machine? Knowledge b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 What is a milling machine? How do you classify the

milling machine? Analysis b

2

Give the working principle of milling machine with a

neat sketch? Mention the size and specification of

milling machine?

comprehension e

3 Classifications of milling machines. comprehension b

4 Explain the importance of Universal milling machine Analysis a

5 Classifications of various milling cutters.? Knowledge b

6 What are the various milling operations? Explain with

the help of suitable sketches. comprehension e

7 Explain the following with neat sketches: Analysis b

8 Planer type milling machine. Knowledge a

9 Rotary table or continuous milling machine. Knowledge b

10 What is a milling machine? How do you classify the

milling machine? Knowledge e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 149

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain the theory of grinding. What is the principle of

metal removal? Discuss the elements of grinding Knowledge b

2 What type of materials are used for grinding wheels?

Discuss the selection of grinding wheel. Knowledge e

3 What is indexing? Explain some common methods of

indexing in milling machines? Analysis b

4 Make a comparison of grinding machine with lapping. comprehension b

5 Explain Grinding processes with diagrams: comprehension e

6 Sketch a broaching tool and explain various elements. Knowledge b

7 How the length of a broach is determined? Explain. Knowledge a

8 What is indexing? Explain some common methods of

indexing in milling machines? Analysis b

9 Make a comparison of grinding machine with lapping. Analysis b

10

Differences between honing and broaching machines

with regard to the construction, working and

applications.

Knowledge e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

Give the working principle of milling machine with a

neat sketch? Mention the size and specification of

milling machine?

Knowledge b

2 Explain the importance of Universal milling machine Knowledge e

3 What are the various milling operations? Explain with

the help of suitable sketches. Analysis b

4 Planer type milling machine. comprehension a

5 Classifications of various milling cutters.? comprehension b

6 What are the various milling operations? Explain with

the help of suitable sketches. Knowledge b

7 Explain the following with neat sketches: Knowledge e

8 Planer type milling machine. Analysis b

9 Rotary table or continuous milling machine. Analysis b

10

Give the working principle of milling machine with a

neat sketch? Mention the size and specification of

milling machine?

Knowledge e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 150

12. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain briefly about effects of cutting fluids while

during metal cutting? Evaluate e

2 Distinguish between ASA and ORS systems? Remember a

3 How to identify the tool life? Understand a

4 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Evaluate e

5 Describe various types of work holding devices? Evaluate e

6 List out various parameters for improve the Tool life? Remember a

7 List out the two parameters for metal cutting? Understand a

8 Distinguish between ASA and ORS systems? Analysis b

9 How to identify the tool life? Understand b

10 State the differences Feed and Depth of Cut? Analysis b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Discuss the various forces encountered in metal

cutting. Evaluate e

2 What are the types of tool materials used in metal

cutting? Discuss their importance. Remember a

3 With the help of neat sketch, explain the tool

geometry. Understand a

4 Describe the effect of cutting fluid on cutting speed

and tool life. Evaluate e

5 What are the different types of chips? Explain

Machinability. Analysis b

6 List out elements of metal cutting? Understand b

7 Differentiate HSS and Tungsten Carbide Tools? Evaluate e

8 Write briefly about Chip formation? Remember a

9 Define the Chips? Understand a

10 List the various types chips? Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 151

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain method of tail stock offset method? Understand a

2 State the differences between Engine lathe and

automatic lathe? Analysis b

3 Discuss the various work holding devices for lathe? Understand b

4 Discuss the various tool holding devices for lathe? Evaluate e

5 List out and explain any two types of mandrel? Remember a

6 Define lathe dogs? Explain how it is used to lathe? Understand a

7 Discuss the lathe carriers? And its applications. Understand a

8 Write the full classification of lathe? Analysis b

9 Explain method of tail stock offset method? Understand b

10 State the differences between Engine lathe and

automatic lathe? Evaluate e

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 List out various types of lathes? Remember a

2 State the differences between engine lathe and centre

lathe? Understand a

3 Explain the four types of operations that need to lathe

machining? Analysis b

4 Differentiate the tool setup for face turning and plain

turning? Understand b

5 Explain briefly about taper turning methods? Evaluate e

6 List out various types of lathes? Remember a

7 What is meant by ‘tool layout’ of a turret lathe? Understand a

8 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a turret

lathe. Analysis b

9 Explain briefly the working principle of a lathe with

diagram . Understand b

10 Name any six work-holding devices and explain

briefly. Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 152

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Explain the principles of shaper, slotter, planer with

diagram? Analysis b

2 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. Understand b

3 How to recognize the slotter? Evaluate e

4 Draw the diagram of slotting machine Remember a

5 Design a whit-worth quick return mechanism for shape Understand a

6 Explain the principles of shaper, slotter, planer with

diagram? Analysis b

7 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. Understand b

8 Explain the feed mechanism in shaper? Analysis b

9 Differentiate between mechanical shaper and hydraulic

shaper? Understand b

10 6. Define the various work holding devices for shaper,

slotter and planer? Evaluate e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Draw the block diagram of a horizontal shaper and write

about its important parts. Evaluate e

2 What are the main operations performed on a planer? Remember a

3 Describe with a schematic sketch the operation of a

hydraulic shaper and explain. Understand a

4 Write the planning machine working principle and its

applications. Understand b

5 Sketch and explain the hydraulic drive of a horizontal

shaper. Evaluate e

6 Explain the principles of shaper, slotter, planer with

diagram? Understand b

7 Illustrate the shaper operations based on principles. Evaluate e

8 How to recognize the slotter? Remember a

9 Draw the diagram of slotting machine Understand a

10 Design a whit-worth quick return mechanism for shape Understand b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 153

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 What is a milling machine? How do you classify the

milling machine? Remember a

2 Give the working principle of milling machine with a

neat sketch? Understand a

3 Classifications of milling machines. Analysis b

4 Explain the importance of Universal milling machine Understand b

5 Classifications of various milling cutters.? Evaluate e

6 What are the various milling operations? Explain with

the help of suitable sketches. Evaluate e

7 Explain the following with neat sketches: Remember a

8 Planer type milling machine. Understand a

9 Rotary table or continuous milling machine. Understand b

10 Mention the size and specification of milling machine? Analysis b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 How to classify the milling cutters? Understand a

2

Define various clearance angles of multi point cutting

tool nomenclature with importance? Analysis b

3 Explain briefly about lapping process? Understand b

4 Distinguish between lapping and honing process? Understand a

5 State the differences lapping and honing with grinding? Analysis b

6

State the differences vertical and horizontal milling

machines? Understand b

7

Describe various types of work holding devices for

milling? Remember a

8 How to classify the milling cutters? Understand a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 154

9 List out the two parameters for milling? Evaluate e

10 Define lapping? How it’s working?

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Short Answer Questions

1 List out various types of abrasives and bonds? Understand a

2

State the differences between surface and cylindrical

grinders? Analysis b

3 Explain the importance of grinding operations? Understand b

4 Differentiate the grinding to other finishing processes? Understand a

5 Explain briefly about methods of methods? Analysis b

6 Define advance grinding processes with examples? Understand b

7 List the various types of grinding machines ? Evaluate e

8 Discuss the selection of grinding wheels? Remember a

9 Define the differentiate natural and artificial abrasives? Understand a

10

Why artificial abrasives are preferred for grinding

wheels? Evaluate e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Discuss the selection of bonds for grinding wheels? Understand a

2 Explain surface grinding machining process? Analysis b

3 Explain cylindrical grinding machining process? Understand b

4 State the differences between surface and cylindrical? Remember a

5

Discuss the various work holding devices grinding

machines? Understand a

6 Explain centreless grinding machining process? Evaluate e

7 List out and explain any two types of work holding Understand a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 155

devices for grinding?

8

Define grinding operations? Explain any three

advantages with suitable examples? Analysis b

9

Discuss the Tool and cutter grinding machine? And its

applications. Understand b

10 Write the full classification of grinding machines? Understand a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 156

13.0 DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-1 (A50316) 13.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A50316

Course Title DESIGN OF MACHINE MEMBERS-I

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

5 1 - 4

Course Coordinator Dr.S.MadhuProfessor,Dr.M.S.M.Gupta Professor, Team of Instructors Ms.A.NaliniDeepthi Assistant Professor

COURSE OVERVIEW: The design of machine members-I focus mainly on design of Machine elements subjected to various types of loads and components include joints; Riveted, Welded, threaded joints shafts and springs. Design basis is strength and stiffness of the parts and selection of material for manufacture of machine elements.

13.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 5

Engineering mechanics, Material Science and Engineering, Kinematics of machinery, Strength of Materials, Machine Drawing.

13.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each

question carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination

shall be conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5

units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid.

The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average

of the two midterm examinations shall be taken as the

final marks secured by each candidate.

75 100

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 157

13.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2

MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES:

The objective of the course is to enable the student in; I. In design and analysis of load transmitting elements and selection of suitable materials and manufacture of these components. II. Analyzing the forces acting on various components and their design. III. Applying the theories of failure and select optimum design size for various

machine elements. IV. Understanding need for joints and their application for different purposes in

transmission of static loads.

13.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

At the end of this course, the student shall have 1. Ability to identify design variables and performance factors in the study machine

elements.

2. Ability to identify different types of fastener and their basic features, related terminology and designations.

3. Ability to design lap and butt joints incase of riveted joints and to design welded

joints for given application. 4. Ability to design shafts for various types of loading.

5. Awareness of the basic features of springs, and means of transfer of motion

commonly used in mechanical engineering.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 158

3.6HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical

foundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science and

engineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-

based systems to real-world problems (fundamental

engineering analysis skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

b An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to

analyze and interpret data (information retrieval skills) H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

c

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a computer-

based system, process, component, or program to meet desired

needs, within realistic constraints such as economic,

environmental, social, political, health and safety,

manufacturability, and sustainability (Creative Skills)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams

(team work) N --

e

An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use

the appropriate computing and engineering requirements for

obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

f

An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and

social

issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)

N --

g

An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and

orally

(speaking / writing skills)

N --

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global

impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals,

organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment

skills)

N --

i

Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

continuing

professional development and life-long learning (continuing

education awareness)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

j A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N --

k

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary

for

computing and engineering practice (practical engineering

analysis

skills)

N --

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 159

l

An ability to apply design and development principles in the

construction of software and hardware systems of varying

complexity (software hardware interface)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional

development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face

competitive examinations that offer challenging and rewarding

careers in computing (successful career and immediate

employment).

N --

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

13.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS:

UNIT-I Introduction: General considerations in the design of Engineering Materials and their

properties–selection – Manufacturing consideration in design. Tolerances and fits – BIS

codes of steels. Theories of failure – Factor of safety – Design for strength and rigidity –

preferred numbers. Fatigue loading : Stress concentration–Theoretical stress Concentration factor–Fatigue

stressconcentration factor – Notch Sensitivity – Design for fluctuating stresses –

Endurance limit – Estimation of Endurance strength – Goodman’s life – Soderberg’s line.

UNIT-II Design of Fasteners:Riveted joints-methods of failure of riveted joints–strength equations–efficiencyof riveted joints – eccentrically loaded riveted joints. Welded Joints: Design of fillet welds-axial loads-circular fillet welds-bending-bolts of

uniform strength.

UNIT-III Keys, Cotters and Knuckle Joints: Design of Keys-stress in keys-cottered joints-spigot and socket,sleeve and cotter, jib and cotter joints-Knuckle joints.

UNIT-IV Design of Shafts: Design of solid and hollow shafts for strength and rigidity–Design of shafts forcomplex loads – Shaft sizes –BIS code – Design of shafts for gear and belt drives. Shaft couplings: Rigid couplings–Muff, Split muff and Flange couplings. Flexible couplings- PIN-Bushcoupling.

UNIT-V Mechanical Springs: Stresses and deflections of helical springs-extension compression

springs-springsfor static and fatigue loading-natural frequency of helical springs-energy

storage capacity-helical torsion springs-co-axial springs.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 160

TEXT BOOKS: T1. P. Kannaiah, (2012), Machine Design, 2nd Edition, SciTech Publications India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, T2. V Bandari (2011), A Text Book of Design of Machine Elements, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw hilleducation (P) Ltd, New Delhi, India.

REFERENCE BOOKS: R1. Design of Machine Elements / V.M. Faires. R2. Machine design/Schaum Series. R3. Mechanical Engineering Design/JE Shigley. R4. Machine Design/S. Md. Jalaluddine/Anuradha Publishers. R5. R.L. Norton (2006), Machine Design ( An Integrated approach), 2nd edition,

Pearson Publishers, Chennai, India R6. Machine Design/UC Jindal/Pearson. R7. Design of Machine Elements (Vol.1)/T. Krishna Rao/IK International Publishing House/2nd Edition. R8. Machine Design / R.S Khurmi, A K Gupta

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 161

13.8 COURSE PLAN:

At the end of the course, the students are able to achieve the following Course Learning

Outcomes.

Lecture.

No.

Course Learning

Outcomes Topics to be covered Reference

1

Introduction

To understand the

machine

Members

UNIT-I

Introduction to machine design

T1&R1

2

Explain stages of

designprocedure

To know the types of

machine design

General considerations in the

design

Classification of Machine

Design , Design Procedure

T1&R1

3 Analyze various

properties ofmaterials

Engineering materials and their

properties T1&R1

4

List various preferred

numbers

Factor of safety – Design for

strength and rigidity – preferred

numbers.

T1&R1

5

Explain Stress

concentration

Stress concentration –

Theoretical stress

Concentration factor

T1&R1

6

To know the concept of

stress

concentration , different

types

of stress concentration

factors

and relation between

them

Stress Concentration and

factors(Kt, Kf), Notch

sensitivity

T1&R1

7

To know the stiffness of

the

component due to

different type

of loads.

Stiffness due to torsion,

bending & problems T1&R1

8

To calculate the failure

points for different

application of loads

combined variable normal

stress and variable shear

stress, problems

T1&R1

9

Differentiate

theoretical

stressconcentration

factor Fatigue stress

concentration

Fatigue stress concentration factor

– Notch Sensitivity T1&R1

10

Explain Endurance

limit

Explanation and problems

on stress concentration.

Endurance limit –

T1&R1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 162

Estimation of Endurance

strength

11

Able to calculate the

stress

Concentration factor for

different features in

machine component.

Problems on Stress

Concentration. T1&R1

12

To Calculate the failure

points for different

application of loads

problems on Fatigue failure T1&R1

13

Explain design criteria

based onstrength and

rigidity

Goodman’s life – Soderberg’s

line.

Solutions of problems on various

types of loading

T2&R1

14 Explain various

types ofFasteners.

UNIT-II

Description of Fasteners methods T2&R1

15

Illustrate various types

ofriveted joints.

Explanation about Lap and but

joints and various parameters

involved in design of riveted

joints.

T2&R1

16

Calculate rivet

efficiency byusing

various strength

equations

efficiency of riveted

joints Calculate stress

induced in rivets

T2&R1

17

Solve problems on

riveted joints

Eccentrically loaded riveted

joints. Problems in design of

riveted joints.

T2&R1

18

To know the

different

applications of

riveted joints, design

procedure

Design of Rivetted joints,

problems

T2&R1

19

To Know the design

procedure for riveted

joints under Eccentric

loads

Eccentric loaded riveted

joints, problems

T2&R1

20 Explain various types of

weldedjoints.

Design of fillet welds-axial loads-

circular fillet welds T2&R1

21

Explain

procedure

forcalculating

size of weld

bending-bolts of uniform strength T2&R1

22 Describe various types

of bolts

Construction design and

proportions of bolts

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 163

23

Define pre-stresses

and stress induced in

working

Explanation of various stresses

induced in bolted joints and

solution of problems in various

applications

T2 & R1

24

Describe procedure for

findingsize of bolts

Explanation of the procedure for

finding

size of bolts

T2 & R1

25 Explain the locking

purpose

Bolted joints and associated

parts for locking purpose T2 & R1

26

To calculate the strength

for different applications

of load

strength of welded joints,

problems, strength of welded

joints, problems Axially loaded un

symmetrical sections

T2 & R1

27

To calculate the design

parameters for different

applications

problems on bolted joints T2 & R1

28

To calculate the design

parameters under

eccentric load

Problems on eccentric joints T2 & R1

29 Describe various type of

Keys,cotters and

knuckle joints

UNIT-III

Sketches for keys cotters

knuckle joints

and explanation of the purpose

of each

joint

T2 & R1

30

Explain procedure for

design of keys in

various applications

Design of Keys, stress in keys T2 & R1

31 Describe procedure for

design of cotter joint Cotter joints, Spigot and socket T2 & R1

32

To calculate the design

parameters of different

keys

Design of keys, problems T1 & T2

33 Describe procedure for

design of knuckle joint Jib and cotter joints, knuckle joint T1 & T2

34 Solve different problems

on different joints

Solution of problems under

application load T1 & T2

35

To know the design

procedure

and To calculate the

design

parameters of sleeve and

cotter Joint

Design of sleeve and cotter

joint, problems on design of

sleeve and cotter joints problems

T1 & T2

36

To know the design

procedure

and To calculate the

Design of knuckle joint,

problems T1 & T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 164

design

Parameters of knuckle

joint.

37 Calculating for

parameters of joints

Clear problems on knuckle joints

and cotter joints T1 & T2

38 Calculating for

parameters of joints

Clear problems on knuckle joints

and cotter joints T1 & T2

39

Explain concept of

power transmission of

power with shafts both

solid and Hollow

UNIT-IV

Formulas for determining size of

both hollow and solid shafts and

various conditions of loading for

strength and Rigidity criteria

T1 & T2

40

Describe design

procedure for

design of shafts for

complex

loads

Design of shafts for complex loads T1 & T2

41

Describe design

procedure for

finding loads and shafts

subjected to gear and

belt drives

Shaft sizes –BIS code

Applications and solution of

problems for

transmission of power by shafts

loaded

with belt and gear drives

T1 & T2

42

Describe various types

of couplings for power

transmission

Sketches of different couplings

and

various parameters to be explained

T1 & T2

43

Able to calculate the

shaft diameter under

different type of loads

Design of shaft based on

strength problems T1 & T2

44

Able to calculate the

shaft diameter under

different combination of

Loads

Shaft is subjected to Axial load

and combined bending and

torsional loads

T1&T2

45

Design procedure for

flexible couplings

Rigid couplings – Muff, Split

muff and

Flange couplings

T1&T2

46 Design procedure for

bush coupling PIN-Bush coupling. T1&T2

47 Design Calculations for

various couplings Problems of different couplings T1&T2

48

Able to calculate the

shaft diameter under

comparing rigidity

parameters and to know

the strength of hollow

shaft.

Design of shaft based on

rigidity and Design of hollow

shaft, problems

T1&T2

49 To know the shaft Design of rigid and T1&T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 165

coupling, and type of

couplings

flexible coupling

50

To know the design

procedure to calculating

design parameters of

clamp coupling

design of clamp coupling,

problems

T1&T2

51

To know the design

procedure to calculating

design parameters of

flange coupling

Flange coupling, design, problems

T1&T2

52

To know the design

procedure to calculating

design parameters of

marine type flange

coupling

Design of marine type flange

coupling, problems

T1&T2

53

To know the design

procedure to calculating

design parameters of

bushed-pin flexible

coupling

Design of Bushed-pin Flexible

coupling

T1&T2

54

Categories various types

of springs for

engineering applications

UNIT-V

Sketches of different springs with

relevant parameters Stresses and

deflections of helical springs

T1&T2

55 To know the mechanical

springs, applications

Introduction to mechanical

springs, types, applications. R1

56 To know the

terminology of springs Important terms of springs R1

57 To know the design

procedure Design of helical spring R1

58

Design procedure for

helical springs

extension compression springs-

springs for static and fatigue

loading

R1

59

To calculate the design

parameters under

different conditions

springs subjected to fatigue

load, problems R1

60

Explain fatigue loading-

natural frequency of

springs-energy storage

capacity

natural frequency of helical

springs-energy storage capacity R1

61 Describe Helical torsion

springs

Helical torsion springs-co-axial

springs. R1

62

To know the natural

frequency of spring,

calculate the energy

storage Capacity

Natural frequency of helical

springs, Energy storage

capacity

T2

63 To calculate strength Problems on springs T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 166

13.9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Course

Program

Outcomes

objectives A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

I H S H S H H

II H H H

III H H S H H

IV S H S

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

13.10 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT

OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Program Outcomes

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

1 S S S

2 H H S H

3 S S H H

4 S

5 H S S S H

S= Supportive H=Highly Relative

parameter of helical

springs

64

To calculate strength

parameter of helical

springs

Problems on torsion springs T2

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 167

13.11. Objective questions

UNIT 1

1. Hooks law holds good up to [ B ]

A) proportional limit B) elastic limit C) yield point D) none

2. Preferred numbers are arranged in [ C ]

A) arithmetic series B) hyperbolic series C) geometric series D) random series

3. The soderberg method is particularly used for _____________ materials. [ A ]

A) Ductile materials B) Brittle materials c) both a &B d) None

4. Rankines theory is used for _______________ materials. [ B ]

A) Ductile materials B) Brittle materials c) both a &B d) None

5. Residual stress in materials [ C ]

A) Acts when external load is applied

B) becomes zero when external load is removed

C) is independent of external loads

D) none

6. The fatigue life of a part can be improved by [ D ]

A) electro plating B) Polishing C) Coating D) Shot peening

7. A reciprocating steam engine connecting rod is subjected to a maximum load of 65

KN. Find the diameter of the connecting rod at its thinnest part, if the permissible

tensile stress is 35 N/mm2 [ A ]

A)50mm B) 60 mm C) 25mm D) 30mm

8. A wrought iron rod is under a compressive load of 350 KN. If the permissible stress

for the material is 52.5 N/mm2.Calculate the diameter of the rod. [ B ]

A)100mm B) 95 mm C) 80 mm D) 30mm

9. The maximum energy that can be stored in a body due to external loading up to the

elastic Limit is called____ [ B ]

A) Resilience B) Proof Resilience C) Strain energy D) Modulus of Elasticity

10. The poisons ratio for Steel varies from [ D ]

A) 0.21 to 0.25

B) 0.25 to 0.33

C) 0.33 to 0.38

D) 0.38 to 0.45

11. Theoretical stress concentration factor is defined as the ratio of [ C ]

A) Maximum stress to the endurance limit

B) nominal stress to the endurance limit

C) Maximum stress to the nominal stress

D) nominal stress to the maximum stress

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 168

12. Endurance limit is determined by attest, applying [ A ]

A) Completely reversed bending B) completely reversed axial loading

C) Completely reversed torsional loading D) any one of the above.

13. The fatigue life of a part can be improved by [ D ]

A) electro plating B) Polishing C) Coating D) Shot peening

14. A steel shaft 50mm diameter 500mm long is subjected to a twisting moment of 1100

N-M, the Total angle of twist being 0.60. Find the maximum shear stress developed

in the shaft [ D ]

A) 28.6 MPa B) 40 Mpa C) 30 Mpa D) 44.8 MPa

15. In the above problem calculate modulus of rigidity [ B ]

A) 80.3KN/mm2 B) 85.6KN/mm2 c) 88.3KN/mm2 D) None

16. The bending stress in a curved beam is [ C ]

A) Zero at the centroidal axis B) Maximum at the neutral axis

C) Zero at the point other than the centroidal axis D) None of the above

17. The maximum bending stress in a curved beam having symmetrical section always

occurs at the [ C ]

A) Centroidal axis B) Neutral axis C) Inside fiber D) Outside fiber

18. The neutral axis of a beam is subjected to [ A ]

A) Zero axis B) Maximum tensile stress

C) Maximum Compressive stress D) Maximum shear stress

19. Stresses induced in the shafts due to the transmission of torque. [ D ]

(a) Bending (b) Shear (c) Tensile (d) Compressive.

20. Two shafts A and B are made of the same material. The diameter of the shaft A is

twice as that of Shaft B. The power transmitted by the shaft A will be ............. times

of shaft B. [ C ]

A) 02 b) 03 c)08 d) 05

UNIT 2 1. The distance between the centers of the adjacent rivets in the same row is called [A]

A) Pitch B) margin C) row pitch D) diagonal pitch

2. Which of the following welded joint is designed for shear strength [B]

A) transverse fillet weld B) parallel fillet weld C) Butt weld D) all of the above

3. According to I.B.R, safety factor of rivet joint should not be less than ___. [ D ]

A)3 B) 2 C)5 D) 4

4. The strength of the unriveted or solid plate per pitch length is equal to ______ [ B ]

A) P*d*σt B) P*t*σt C)(p-t)d*σt D)(p-d)t*σt

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 169

5. A rivet is specified by [ A ]

A) Shank Diameter B) Length of the rivet C) Type Head D) Length of the tail

6. According to Indian standards, the diameter of the rivet hole for a 24mm diameter of

rivet should be [ C ]

A) 23mm B) 24mm C) 25mm D) 26mm

7. A lap joint is always in [ A ]

A) Single B) Double C) Both A &B D) None

8. A single riveted lap joint is made in 15 mm thick plates with 20mm diameter rivets.

Determine the strength of the joint if the pitch of rivets is 60mm. Take σt = 120 MPa

ґ= 90MPa and σc= 160Mpa [ A ]

A) 28280 N B) 3000N C) 43234 N D) None

9. For the above problem determine the efficiency of the joint [ D ]

A) 53.5% B) 60% C D) 63.5% D) None

10. The eye bolts are used for [ C ]

A) Transmission of power B) locking devices

C) lifting and transporting heavy machines D) Absorbing shocks and vibrations

11. A bolt of M24X3 means that _______. [ D ]

A) Pitch is 24 mm and Dia is 3mm B) Pitch dia is 24 and pitch is 3mm

C) Nominal Dia is 24mm and pitch is 3mm D)None

12. A bolt is specified by its ____. [ A ]

A) Nominal Diameter and pitch B) Pitch diameter

C) Only Nominal diameter D) None

13. The shock absorbing capacity of a bolt be increased by [ B ]

A) increasing its shank diameter B) decreasing the shank diameter

C) tightening the bolt properly

D) making the shank diameter equal to the core diameter

14. The principle of applying heat and pressure is widely used in [ D ]

A) Spot welding B) seam welding

C) projection welding D) all of these

15. The parallel fillet welded joint is designed for [ D ]

A) Tensile strength B) compressive strength

C) bending strength D) shear strength

16. The transverse fillet welded joint is designed for [ A ]

A) Tensile strength B) compressive strength

C) bending strength D) shear strength

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 170

17. The center to center distance between two consecutive rivets in a row, is called [ B]

A) margin B) pitch C) back pitch D) diagonal pitch

18. The resilience of a bolt may be increased by [ B ]

A) increasing its shank diameter B) increasing its length

C) Decreasing its shank diameter D) Decreasing its length

19. A bolt of uniform strength can be developed by [ A ]

A) Keeping the core diameter of threads equal to the diameter of unthreaded portion of

the bolt

B)Keeping the core diameter of threads smaller than the diameter of unthreaded portion

of the bolt

C) Keeping the nominal diameter of threads equal to the diameter of unthreaded portion

of the bolt

D) None of the above

20. According to Unwin’s formula, the relation between diameter of rivet hole (d) and

thickness of plate (t) is given by [ D ]

A) d=t B) d=1.6√𝑡 C) d=2t D) d=6t

UNIT 3

1. Which key transmits power through frictional resistance only [ D ]

A) Wood ruff key B) Kennedy C) Sunk D) Saddle

2. Shape of wood ruff key is like [ B ]

A) Cylinder B) Semicircle C) Sphere D) Tapered key

3. A key way lowers [ C ]

A) The strength of the shaft B) The rigidity of the shaft

C) Both the Strength and Rigidity of the shaft

D) the ductility of the material of the shafts.

4. A Cotter joint is used to transmit [ D ]

A) Axial tensile load only B) axial compressive load only

C) Combined axial and twisting loads D) Axial tensile or Compressive loads.

5. The permissible crushing stress for the usual key material is at least ___ [ A ]

permissible shearing stress.

A) Twice B) Thrice c) Equal d) None

6. The eye bolts are used for [ C ]

A) transmission of power B) locking devices

C) lifting and transporting heavy Machines

D) absorbing shocks and vibrations

7. A bolt of M24X3 means that _______. [ D ]

A) Pitch is 24 mm and Dia is 3mm B) Pitch dia is 24 and pitch is 3mm

C) Nominal Dia is 24mm and pitch is 3mm D)None

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 171

8. A bolt is specified by its ____. [ A ]

A) Nominal Diameter and pitch B) Pitch diameter

C) Only Nominal diameter D) None

9. The eye bolts are used for [ C ]

A) Transmission of power B) locking devices

C) lifting and transporting heavy machines D) absorbing shocks and vibrations

10. The shock absorbing capacity of a bolt be increased by [ B ]

A) increasing its shank diameter B) decreasing the shank diameter

C) tightening the bolt properly D) making the shank diameter equal to the core

diameter

11. An axle is subjected to [ A ]

A) Bending only B) Direct load only C) Torsion only D) All of the above

12. The design of shafts made of brittle materials is based on__ theory. [ B ]

A) Maximum Shear stress theory B) Rankines Theory C) Both A&B D) None

.

13. Stresses induced in the shafts due to the transmission of torque. [D]

A) Bending B) Shear C) Tensile D) Compressive.

14. Two shafts A and B are made of the same material. The diameter of the shaft A is

twice as that of shaft B. The power transmitted by the shaft A will be .............

times of shaft B. [ C ]

A) 02 B) 03 C)08 D) 05

15. A cotter joint is used to transmit [ D ]

A) Axial tensile load only B) axial compressive load only

C) Combined axial and twisting loads D) axial tensile or compressive loads

16.The taper on cotter varies from [ D ]

A) 1 in 15 to 1 in 10 B) 1 in 24 to 1 in 20

C) 1 in 32 to 1 in 24 D) 1 in 48 to 1 in 24

17. The length of cotter, in a sleeve and cotter joint, is taken as [ D ]

A) 1.5d B) 2.5d C) 3d 4) 4d

18. In a steam engine, the valve rod is connected to an eccentric by means of a [ A ]

A) Knuckle joint B) Universal joint C) Flange coupling D) Cotter joint

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 172

19.In a steam engine, the piston rod is connected to a crosshead by means of a [ D ]

A) Knuckle joint B) Universal joint C) Flange coupling D) Cotter joint

20. In a gib and cotter joint, the thickness of gib is _____ thickness of cotter [ C ]

A) more than B) less than C) equal to D) not equal to

UNIT 4

1. In a muff coupling, the effective length of the key is [ B ]

A) Equal to sleeve length B) Equal to half of the sleeve length

C) Double the sleeve length D) Independent of sleeve length

D) Absorbing shocks and vibrations

2. The design of shafts made of brittle materials is based on [ B ]

A)Guest’s theory B) Rankines theory C) St.Venants theory D) Von mises theory

3. A bolt is specified by its ____. [A]

A) Nominal `Diameter and pitch B) Pitch diameter C) Only Nominal diameterD)

None

4. A transmission shaft subjected to bending loads must be on the basis of [A]

A) Maximum normal stress theory B) maximum shear stress theory

C) Maximum normal stress and maximum shear stress theories

D) Fatigue strength

5. The shock absorbing capacity of a bolt be increased by [B]

A) increasing its shank diameter B) decreasing the shank diameter C) tightening the

bolt properly D) making the shank diameter equal to the core diameter

6.The maximum shear stress theory is used for [B]

A) Brittle materials B) ductile materials C) plastic materials D) non-ferrous materials

7. The standard length of the shaft is [D]

A) 5m B)6m C)7m D)all of these

8. The eye bolts are used for [C]

A) Transmission of power B) locking devices C) lifting and transporting heavy

machines

9. The maximum normal stress theory is used for [A]

A) Brittle materials B) ductile materials C) plastic materials D) non-ferrous

materials

10. A bolt of M24X3 means that _______. [D]

A) Pitch is 24 mm and Dia is 3mm B) Pitch dia is 24 and pitch is 3mm C)

Nominal Dia is 24mm and pitch is 3mm D)None

11. Two shafts A and B are made of the same material the diameter of shaft B is twice

that of shaft A. The ratio of power which can be transmitted by shaft A to that of

shaft B is ___________[A]

A) 1/8 b) 1/7 c) 1/5 1/9

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 173

12. The nature of stress induced in the holding down bolts in a compression coupling is _

[A]

A) Compressive stress B) Tensile Stress C) Bending Stress d) Shear stress

13. Hook’s coupling is used to connect two shafts whose axes intersect at a _____. [c]

A) A) Large angle B) 900 c) Small angle d) 450

14. The sleeve or muff coupling is designed as a [D]

A) Thin cylinder B) thick cylinder C) solid shaft D) hollow shaft

15. Oldham coupling is used to connect two shafts [C]

A) Which are perfectly aligned B) which are not in exact alignment

C) Which have lateral misalignment D) whose axes intersect at a small angle

16. When a shaft is subjected to a bending moment M and a twisting moment T, then the

equivalent twisting moment is equal to [C]

A) M+T B)M2+T2 C)√𝑀2 + 𝑇2 D)√𝑀2 − 𝑇2

17. Two shafts will have equal strength, if [D]

A) Diameter of both the shafts is same

B) Angle of twist of both the shafts is same

C) Material of both the shafts is same

D) Twisting moment of both the shafts is same

18. The eye bolts are used for [C]

A) Transmission of power B) locking devices C) lifting and transporting heavy

machines D) absorbing shocks and vibrations

19. Which of the following loading is considered for the design of axles? [A]

A) Bending moment only

B) Twisting moment only

C) Combined bending and torsion

D) Combined action of bending moment, twisting moment and axial thrust

20. Material used for shafts should have the following properties [C]

A) High strength B) good machinability C) Both A & B D) None

UNIT 5

1. If a spring is cut –down in to two equal half springs the stiffness of the cut spring will

be [C ]

A) Approximately half B) same C) approximately double D) unpredictable

2. Concentric helical springs should be [B]

A) Wound in the same direction B) wound with opposite hand helices

C) Could be wound in any direction D) None

3. Spring index is [C]

A) Coil diameter /Wire diameter B) Its capacity of storing energy

C) Load required to produce unit deflection D) Indication of the quality of spring.

4. A leaf spring in automobiles is used [A]

A) to apply forces B) to measure forces

C) to absorb shocks D) to store strain energy.

5. When a close coil helical spring is compressed its wire is subjected to _______ [C]

A) Compression B) Shear c) Tension D) Bending

6. Which of the following spring is used in a mechanical wrist watch? [C]

(A) Helical compression spring (B) Spiral spring

(C) Torsion spring (D) Belleville spring

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 174

7. A spring used to absorb shocks and vibrations is [D]

(A) closely-coiled helical spring (B) open-coiled helical spring

(C) Conical spring (D) leaf spring

8. The spring mostly used in gramophones is [D]

(A) Helical spring (B) conical spring

(C) Laminated spring (D) flat spiral spring

9. When a helical compression spring is subjected to an axial compressive load, the stress

induced in the wire is [C]

(A) Tensile stress (B) compressive stress

(C) Shear stress (D) bending stress

10. In a close coiled helical spring, the spring index is given by did where D and d are the

mean coil diameter and wire diameter respectively. For considering the effect of

curvature, the Wahl’s stress factor K is given by [B]

(A)4𝑐−1

4𝑐+4+

0.615

𝑐 (B)

4𝑐−1

4𝑐−4+

0.615

𝑐 (C)

4𝑐+1

4𝑐−4−

0.615

𝑐 (D)

4𝑐+1

4𝑐+4−

0.615

𝑐

11. When helical compression spring is cut into halves, the stiffness of the resulting

spring will be [B]

(A) Same (B) double

(C) One-half (D) one-fourth

12. Two close coiled helical springs with stiffness k1 and k2 respectively are connected in

series. The stiffness of an equivalent spring is given by [A]

(A) 𝑘1.𝑘2

𝑘1+𝑘2 (B)

𝑘1−𝑘2

𝑘1+𝑘2 (C)

𝑘1+𝑘2

𝑘1.𝑘2 (D)

𝑘1−𝑘2

𝑘1.𝑘2

13. When two concentric coil springs made of the same material, having same length and

compressed equally by an axial load, the load shared by the two springs will be ….. To

the square of the diameters of the wires of the two springs. [A]

(A) Directly proportional (B) inversely proportional

(C) Equal

14. In leaf spring, the longest leaf is known as [B]

(A) Lower leaf (B) master leaf

(C) Upper leaf (D) none of these

15. An axle is subjected to [A]

A) Bending only B) Direct load only C) Torsion only D) All of the above

16. The design of shafts made of brittle materials is based on_rankines_ theory. [A]

A) Maximum Shear stress theory B) Rankine’s Theory C) Both A &B D) None

17. Two shafts will be have equal strength if twisting moment of both the shafts is same.

18. Stresses induced in the shafts due to the transmission of torque. [D]

(a) Bending (b) Shear (c) Tensile (d) Compressive.

19. Two shafts A and B are made of the same material. The diameter of the shaft A is

twice as that of shaft B. The power transmitted by the shaft A will be ...... times of shaft

B. [C]

A) 02 b) 03 c)08 d) 05

20. The shock absorbing capacity of a bolt be increased by [B]

A) increasing its shank diameter B) decreasing the shank diameter

C) Tightening the bolt properly D) making the shank diameter equal to the core

diameter

13.12. Tutorial questions

Sl.no Questions Blooms Course

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 175

Taxonomy

level

outcomes

Unit 1

Short answer questions

1. Classify the various types Machine Design. Apply A

2. Explain the difference between linear and lateral

strain.

Understand I

3. Briefly explain shear stress and shear strain? Apply B

4. Write the steps to be followed while designing a

machine element?

Understand B

5. Define the Ductility and malleability. Remember D

6. Distinguish Hardness from toughness.

Apply A

7.

Enumerate the most commonly used engineering

materials and state at least one important

application of each.

Remember

D

8. What is meant by Shaft basis system? Understand B

9.

Discuss the effects of the size factor on endurance

limit.

Understand

B

10. State any two theories of failure Remember D

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 1

long answer questions

1.

A shaft is designed based on maximum distortion

energy theory with a factor of safety of 2.0. The

material used is 30C8 steel with a yield stress of 310

MPa. It is subjected to an axial load of 40 kN.

Calculate the maximum torque capacity. Diameter

of the shaft is 20 mm.

Apply M

2.

The principal stresses induced at a point in a

machine component made of steel50C4 (Syt = 460

N/mm2) are as follows: Maximum principal stress =

200 N/mm2 and Minimum principal stress = 150

N/mm2. Calculate the factor of safety by

i. maximum shear stress theory and ii. Distortion

energy theory

Apply A

3.

Find the diameter of a solid shaft to transmit 25 kW

at 300 rpm. Take the maximum allowable shear

stress as 50 N/mm2. If a hollow shaft is to be used in

place of the solid shaft, find the inside and outside

Apply a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 176

diameter when the ratio of inside to outside diameter

is 0.6.

4.

A steel solid shaft transmitting 15KWat 200 rpm is

supported on two bearings 750mm apart and has two

gears keyed to it. The pinion having 30 teeth of

5mm module is located 100mm to the left of the

right hand bearing and delivers power horizontally

to the right. The gear having 100 teeth of 5mm

module is located 150mm to the right of the left

hand bearing and receiver power in a vertical

direction from below. Using an allowable stress of

55MN/m2 in shear, determine the dia of the shaft.

Apply A

5.

Calculate the maximum thickness of the steel sheet

into which holes of 20mm size can be punched. The

ultimate tensile strength of the sheet material is 250

Mpa. The allowable compressive stress during the

punching operation in the hardened end of the punch

is limited to 400 MPa.

Apply M

6.

A round shaft made of cold finished AISI 1020 steel

is subjected to a variable torque whose maximum

value is 700 KN-m. For a factor of safety of 1.5 on

the Soderberg criterion, Calculate the diameter of

the shaft if i. The torque is reversed

ii. The torque varies from zero to maximum

iii. The torque varies from 300 N m to a maximum.

Assume, Correction factor for type of loading other than bending = 0.6 Size correction factor = 0.85 Surface correction factor = 0.87 Ultimate tensile strength =550 MPa. Yield strength = 460 MPa

Apply A

7.

A solid circular shaft is subjected to a bending

moment of 3000N-m and a torque of 10,000N-m.

The shaft is made of 45C8 steel having ultimate

tensile stress of 700Mpa and a ultimate shear stress

of 500Mpa.Assuming a factor of safety as 6,

determine the diameter of shaft.

Remember D

8.

A circular bar of 500 mm length is supported freely

at it two ends. It is acted upon by a central

concentrated cyclic load having a minimum value of

20 kN. And a maximum value of 50 kN. Calculate

the diameter of the bar by taking a factor of safety of

1.5, size effect of 0.85, and surface finish factor of

0.9. The material properties of bar are given by:

ultimate strength of 650 Mpa, yield strength of 500

Mpa and endurance strength of 350 Mpa.

Apply A

9.

A hot rolled steel shaft is subjected to a torsional

moment that varies from 330 N-m clockwise to 110

N-m counterclockwise and an applied bending

moment at a critical section varies from 440 N-m to

-220 N-m. The shaft is of uniform cross-section and

Apply M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 177

no key way is present at the critical section.

Determine the required shaft diameter. The material

has an ultimate strength of 550MN/m2 and a yield

strength of 410MN/m2. Take the endurance limit as

half the ultimate strength, factor of safety of 2, size

factor of 0.85 and surface finish factor of 0.62

10.

A steel rod is subjected to a reversed axial load of

180 kN.Calculate the diameter of the rod for a factor

of safety of 2. Neglect column action. The material

has an ultimate tensile strength of 1070 Mpa and

yield strength of 910 Mpa. The endurance limit is

reversed bending may be assumed to be one half of

the ultimate tensile strength. The correction factors

are as follows. Load factor =0.7; surface finish

factor=0.8 Size factor =0.85; stress concentration

factor = 1.

Apply A

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 2

Short answer questions

1. Enumerate the different types of riveted joints. Remember E

2. Classify the rivet heads according to Indian

Standard Specification.

Apply A

3. Name the assumptions made in the welded joints Remember D

4. What is the difference between Caulking and

fullering? Explain with the help of neat sketches.

Apply A

5. What do you understand by the term riveted joint? Remember D

6. Write the relative advantages and disadvantages of

welded joints over riveted joints?

Remember D

7. Define Root and crest points screw threads Remember I

8. Define pitch and back pitch in riveted joints. Remember I

9. What is the difference between transverse and

parallel welded joints

Apply A

10. Differentiate chain and zig-zag riveted joints. Analyze M

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 2

long answer questions

1.

Two plates 16 mm thick are joined by a

double riveted lap joint. The pitch of each

row of rivets is 90 mm. The rivets are 25

mm in diameter. The permissible stresses

Apply E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 178

are 140 MPa in tension, 80 MPa in shear

and 160 MPa in crushing. Calculate the

efficiency of the joint

2.

A double rivetted butt joint in which the

pitch of the rivets in the outer rows is twice

that in the inner rows, connects two 16mm

thick plates with two cover plates each

12mm thick. The diameter of rivets is

22mm. Determine the pitches of the rivets

in the two rows if the working stresses are

not to exceed the following limits.

Tensile stress in plates = 100 MPa

Shear stress in rivets = 75 MPa

Bearing stress in rivets and plates = 150

MPa.Make a fully dimensioned sketch of

the joint by showing at least two views.

Apply E

3.

A 125 x95x 10 mm angle is joined to a

frame by two parallel fillet welds along the

edges of 150mm leg. The angle is subjected

to a tensile load of 180 kN. Find the length

of the weld if the permissible static load per

mm weld length is 430 N.

Apply D

4.

A double riveted lap joint is made between

15mm thick plates. The rivet diameter and

pitch are 25mm and 75mm respectively. If

the ultimate stresses are 400 MPa in tension

and 320 MPa in shear and 640 MPa in

crushing, find the minimum force per inch,

which will rupture the joint. If the above

joint is subjected to a load such that the

factor of safety is 4, find out the actual

stresses developed in the plates and the

rivets.

Apply E

5.

A double riveted double cover butt joint is

made in 12mm thick plates with 18mm

diameter rivets. Find the efficiency of the joint

for a pitch of 80mm, if ót= 115MPa; ô=

80MPa; and óc= 160Mpa.

E

6.

A double riveted lap joint is made between 15-

mm thick plates. The rivet diameter and pitch

are 25 mm and 75 mm respectively. If the

ultimate stresses are 400 MPa in tension, 320

MPa in shear and 640 MPa in crushing, find

the minimum force per pitch which will rupture

the joint. If the above joint is subjected to a

load such that the factor of safety is two, find

Apply d

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 179

out the actual stresses developed in the plates

and the rivets.

7.

A bracket in the form of a plate is fitted to a

column by means of four rivets A, B, C and D

in the same vertical line as shown in Figure4.

AB = BC= CD = 60 mm. E is the mid-point of

BC. A load of 100 KN is applied to the bracket

at a point F which is at a horizontal distance of

150 mm from E. The load acts at an angle of

300 to the horizontal. Calculate the diameter of

rivets, which are made of steel having a yield

stress in shear of 240 MPa. Take a factor of

safety of 1.5.

Apply G

8.

A triple riveted lap joint with zig-zag

riveting is to be designed to connect two

plates of 6 mm thickness. Calculate the

diameter of the rivet, pitch of rivets and

distance between the rows of the rivets.

Indicate how the joint will fail. Also, find

the efficiency of the joint. The permissible

stresses are 120 MPa intension, 100 MPa in

shear and 150 MPa in crushing.

Apply E

9.

A lever loaded safety valve has a diameter

of 100 mm and the blow off pressure is

1.6N/mm2. The fulcrum of the lever is

screwed into the cast iron body of the

cover. calculate the diameter of the

threaded part of the fulcrum, if the

permissible tensile stress is limited to 50

MPa and the lever ratio is 8

Apply D

10.

A punching press is required to punch a

maximum hole size of 20 mm diameter in a

material having ultimate shear strength of

300N/mm2. If the thickness of the sheet is 5

mm, design the screw and the nut.

Apply D

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 180

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 3

Short answer questions

1. What are the different types of key? Remember E

2. What are the advantages of gib key? Remember E

3. Differentiate between sunk and saddle keys. Analyze M

4. Differentiate between hollow and flat saddle keys. Analyze M

5. List the advantages of sunk keys. Remember E

6. List the disadvantages of saddle key. Remember E

7. Write the advantages of woodruff key. Remember E

8. Write the applications of key joints. Remember E

9. What types of stress induced in key joints Remember E

10. Write the steps to be followed while designing a

Key joints?

Remember E

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 3

long answer questions

1. When shaft is subjected to fluctuating loads, what

will be the equivalent twisting moment and

equivalent bending moment?

Remember h

2. A steel spindle transmits 4KW at 800r.p.m. The

angular deflection should not exceed 0.25° per

meter of the spindle. If the modulus of rigidity for

the material of the spindle is 84G.pa.calculate the

diameter of the spindle and the shear stress

induced in the spindle

Apply d

3. Define equivalent twisting moment and equivalent

bending moment. State when these two terms are

used in design of shafts.

Remember D

4. A shaft made of mild steel is required to transmit

100KW at 300r.p.m. the supported length of the

shaft is 3mts. It carries two pulleys each weighing

1500N supported at a distance of 1 meter from the

ends respectively assuming the safe value of stress,

Determine the diameter of the shaft

Evaluate K

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 181

5. How are the keys classified? Draw neat sketches of

different types of keys and state their applications?

Remember D

6. Design a sleeve and cotter joint to resist a tensile

load of 60KN. All parts of the joint Are

made of the same material with the following

allowable stresses: σ t = 60Mpa; τ =70Mpa; and σ c

=125Mpa.

Analyze M

7. Design and draw a cotter Joint to support a load

varying from 30KN in compression to 30KN in

tension. The material used is carbon steel for

which the following allowable Stresses may be

used. The load is applied statically. Tensile stress =

Compressive Stress = 50Mpa; Shear Stress =

35Mpa; and Crushing Stress = 90Mpa.

Remember D

8. What is a cotter joint? Explain with the help of a

neat sketch, how a cotter joint is made?

Remember D

9. Write the design procedure for the knuckle joint?

Remember D

10. Design a sleeve and cotter joint?

Remember D

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 4

Short answer questions

1. Explain the terms (i)Torsional Rigidity (ii)Lateral

Rigidity

Understand B

2. Define how the working of clamp coupling vary

from the muff coupling?

Remember D

3. What is the purpose of the rubber bush in bushed-

pin flexible coupling?

Remember D

4. Explain the types of stresses induced in shafts? Understand B

5. What is difference between rigid coupling and

flexible coupling?

Remember I

6. What is the function of transmission shaft? Remember I

7. Explain Clamp coupling and give its applications? Understand D

8. Define coupling with its types? Remember D

9. Define equivalent torsional moment and

equivalent bending moment. State when these two

terms are used in the design of shafts

Remember D

10. Explain Muff coupling and give its applications? Understand E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 182

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 4

long answer questions

1. When shaft is subjected to fluctuating loads, what

will be the equivalent twisting moment and

equivalent bending moment?

Remember D

2. A steel spindle transmits 4KW at 800r.p.m. The

angular deflection should not exceed 0.25° per

meter of the spindle. If the modulus of rigidity for

the material of the spindle is 84G.pa.Calculate the

diameter of the spindle and the shear stress induced

in the spindle

Apply A

3. A shaft made of mild steel is required to transmit

100KW at 300r.p.m. the supported length of the

shaft is 3mts. It carries two pulleys each weighing

1500N supported at a distance of 1 meter from the

ends respectively assuming the safe value of stress

calculate the diameter of the shaft

Apply A

4. A solid circular shaft is subjected to a bending

moment of 3000N-m and a torque of 10000N-m.

the shaft is made of 45C8 steel having ultimate

tensile stress of 700Mpa And a ultimate shear

stress of 500Mpa.Assuming a factor of safety as 6,

Calculate the diameter of the shaft

Apply A

5. Calculate the diameter of a solid steel shaft to

transmit 20KW at 200 r.p.m. The ultimate shear

stress for the steel may be taken as 360Mpa and a

factor of safety as 8.If a hollow shaft is to be used

in place of the solid shaft, Find the inside and

outside diameter when the ratio of inside to outside

diameter is 0.5

Apply A

6. Design a bushed- pin type flexible couplings to

transmit 25KW at 960 rpm. Use the following

stress values, Shear stress =50MPa( shaft and key )

= 30 MPa, Crushing Stress = 90MPa, Bearing

Pressure = 0.45 N/mm2.

Analyze m

7. Design and make a neat dimensional sketch of a

muff coupling which is used to connect two steel

shafts to transmitting 40KW at 350r.p.m.the

material for the shafts and key is plain carbon steel

for which allowable shear and crushing stresses

may be taken as 40Mpa and 80Mpa respectively.

The material for the muff is cast iron for which the

Analyze M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 183

allowable shear stress may be assumed as 15Mpa

8. Describe with the help of neat sketches, the types

of various shaft couplings, mentioning the uses of

each type

Remember D

9. Design and give a dimensioned sketch of a rigid

flange coupling for the followingspecifications:

Diameter of shafts to be connected = 50

mmNumber of machined bolts fitted to reamed

holes = 4

Pitch circle diameter of bolts = 150 mm

The material for the bolts and the shafts is the

same, and had an ultimate strengthof 525 MN/m2

with yield point in tension of 315 MN/m2. The size

of the boltsshould be such as to have the same

capacity as the shaft in torsion. Assume thatthe

bolts are “fitter tight" and the shear stress in

uniformly distributed in theshank of bolts under

load.

Analyze M

10. Design a bushed- pin type flexible couplings to

transmit 25KW at 960 rpm. Use the following

stress values, Shear stress =50MPa( shaft and key )

= 30 MPa, Crushing Stress = 90MPa, Bearing

Pressure = 0.45 N/mm2

Analyze M

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 5

Short answer questions

1. What are the differences between helical torsion

spring and tension helical springs

Remember D

2. Write the objectives of series and parallel

connections of springs

Remember D

3. Define: (i) spring index and (ii) stiffness of springs Remember D

4. Define what graduated length and full length

leaves in multi leaf spring?

Remember D

5. Explain the function of key and its applications Understand E

6. Distinguish between closely coiled and open

coiled helical springs?

Analyze M

7. Explain buckling and surge in springs. Understand E

8. Obtain the expression for stiffness of helical

springs

Analyze M

9. What is free length of helical spring Remember D

10. Define spring rate and spring index. Remember D

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 184

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 5

long answer questions

1. Design a spring for spring loaded safety valve for

the following conditions. Operating pressure is 10

bar. Diameter of the valve seat is 100 mm. Design

shear stress for the spring material is 400 N/mm2.

Modulus of rigidity G = 80 *104N/mm2.The

spring is to be kept in a casing of 120 mm inner

diameter and 350 mm long. The spring is to be at

maximum lift to 6 mm, when the pressure is 11 bar

Analyze M

2. A helical spring is subjected to loads ranging from

2kN to 2.5kN. The axial compression of the spring

over the above load range is approximately 5 mm.

Assume spring index of 6, design the spring.

Analyze M

3. Why the circular cross section is most commonly

used for spring and not others? Under what

circumstances the non-circular section would be

recommended.

Apply A

4. Write short notes on Helical springs. Remember E

5. Calculate the maximum shear stress and deflection

induced in a helical spring of the following

specifications, if it has to absorb 1000N-M of

energy.Mean diameter of spring=100mm;

Diameter of steelwire, used for making the spring

=20mm; Number of coils=30; Modulus of rigidity

of steel =85KN/mm²

Apply A

6. A helical spring is made from a wire of 6mm

diameter and has outside diameter of 75mm.If the

permissible shear stress is 350Mpa and modulus of

rigidity 84KN/mm2.Find the axial load which the

spring can carry and the deflection per active turn.

Understand D

7. Design a set of helical steel springs to support a

static load of 1563 N per springs. In order to

provide isolation, the natural frequency of the

system must not exceed 100 cycles/minute based

on each spring supporting a load of 156.3 kg

weight. Use a shear yield point of 466.7 MPa, a

factor of safety 3and a spring index of 6. Design

for squared and ground ends and a 20% clash

allowance.

Analyze m

8. Design a helical spring for spring loaded safety Analyze M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 185

valve for the following conditions:

Diameter of valve seat = 65 mm; Operating

pressure = 0.7 N/mm2; Maximum pressure when

the valve blows off freely = 0.75 N/mm2;

Maximum lift of the valve when the pressure rises

from 0.7 to 0.75 N/mm2 = 3.5mm; Maximum

allowable stress = 550 MPa ; Modulus of rigidity =

84kN/mm2; Spring index = 6. Draw the neat

sketch of the free spring showing the main

dimensions

9. Design a leaf spring for the following

specifications:

Total load = 140 kN; Number of springs

supporting the load = 4; Maximum number of

leaves = 10; Span of the spring = 1000 mm ;

Permissible deflection = 80 mm

Take young modulus, E = 200 kN/mm2 and

allowable stress in the spring material as 600 MPa

Analyze M

10. Design a coil spring for a spring-loaded governor

to give a deflection of 125mm under an axial load

of 115N. The mean radius of the coil is 25mm and

thewire diameter is 6mm.Take C= 0.8x105N/mm2.

Check the spring for buckling.Give a neat sketch

of the spring in the uncompressed state

Analyze M

13.13.ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 1

Short answer questions

1. What is meant by Hole basis system? Understand D

2. Name the types of fits? Remember A

3. Write the advantage and limitation of hollow shaft

over solid shaft?

Remember A

4. Distinguish Elastic Deformation from Plastic

Deformation

Apply E

5. Discuss briefly the Important Factors to be

considered in the selection of Materials.

Understand H

6. What is the factor of safety for i. Ductile materials

and ii. Brittle materials

Understand H

7. What are advantages of preferred numbers? Remember D

8. Explain the reducing stress concentration in

stepped bar.

Apply A

9. Discuss the effects of the Surface finish factor on

endurance limit.

Understand I

10. Write type of stresses induced in shafts? Remember D

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 186

Sl.no Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 1

long answer questions

1.

A stepped shaft transmits a torque varying from

800 N m to 1200 N m. The ratio of diameter is 1.5

and the stress concentration factor is 1.2. Calculate

the diameter of the shaft for an infinite life for a

design factor of safety 1.8. The ultimate tensile

strength of the material of the shaft is 600 MPa.

Yield stress of the material is 450 Mpa

Apply M

2.

Calculate the diameter of a circular rod made of

ductile material with fatigue strength (complete

stress reversal) Endurance limit = 280 MPa and a

tensile yield strength of 350 MPa. The member is

subjected to a varying axial load from 700 kN. to

300 kN. Assume Fatigue stress concentration

factor = 1.8 and Factor of Safety = 2.

Apply M

3.

A pulley is keyed to a shaft midway between two

anti-friction bearings. The bending moment of the

pulley varies from 150 N m to 450 N m as

torsional moment of the shaft varies from 50 N m

to 150 N m. The frequency of variation of the

loads is the same as the shaft speed. The shaft is

made of cold drawn steel having an ultimate

strength of 550 MPa and yield strength of 310

MPa. Determine the required diameter for an

indefinite life. The stress concentration factor for

the key way in bending and torsion may be taken

as 1.6 and 1.3 respectively. Use a design factor of

1.8, size factor 0.85 and surface correction factor

0.88. Use for torsion, Size correction factor = 0.6

and the nominal design torsion stress = 0.6 Yield

point in tension.

Apply M

4. Explain various steps involved in Design

Procedure. Understand D

5. Explain different methods to reduce stress

concentration? Understand D

6. Explain Goodmans’smethod for combination of

stresses with neat diagram? Understand D

7. Explain the procedure to obtain S-N curve for

ferrous metals Understand E

8. A machine component is subjected to axial,

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 187

bending and torsional stresses. Explain the design

procedure to obtain the final dimensions.

9.

A mild steel rod of 12 mm diameter was tested for

tensile strength with the Gauge length of 60 mm.

Following observations were recorded: Final

length = 80 mm; Final diameter = 7 mm; Yield

load = 3.4 kN. And Ultimate load = 6.1 kN.

Calculate: 1. yield stress, 2. ultimate tensile stress,

3. percentage reduction in area, and 4. percentage

elongation.

Apply A

10.

A hollow shaft of 40 mm outer diameter and 25

mm inner diameter is subjected to a twisting

moment of 120 N-m, simultaneously, it is

subjected to an axial thrust of 10 kN. And a

bending moment of 80 N-m. Calculate the

maximum compressive and shear stresses

Apply C

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 2

Short answer questions

1 State permanent joints? Remember B

2 State the disadvantage of butt joint overlap joint? Remember B

3 What is chain riveted lap joint? Remember A

4 State reinforcement in weld? What are its

advantage and disadvantage?

Remember E

5 What is the cause of residual stresses in welded

joints? How are they relieved?

Remember I

6 Distinguish between hot riveting and cold

riveting?

Analyze H

7 Why are riveted joints replaced by welded joints? Understand A

8 Explain why the welded joints fail at throat. Apply B

9 Why starting and stopping allowances added to

weld length?

Understand D

10 Classify the riveted joints. Apply I

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 2

long answer questions

1.

Derive an expression for the maximum load in a

bolt. When a bracket with a circular base is bolted

to a wall by means of four bolts.

Apply M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 188

1. Derive a Design procedure for double parallel fillet

welded joints?

Apply M

2. Derive the expressions for designing eccentric

loaded riveted joints?

Apply M

3. Explain about eccentric riveted joints? Understand D

4. Derive the expressions for designing eccentric

loaded welded joints?

Apply E

5.

The head of an air compressor cylinder is attached

by eight bolts. The cylinder bore diameter is 80

mm and the maximum working pressure is limited

to 3 MPa. Determine the diameter of bolt, when a

copper-asbestos is used between the head and the

cylinder and an initial compressive load of 5 KN is

required on the gasket for a leak proof joint.

Ultimate tensile strength, Yield strength and

endurance limit for material are 400 MPa, 340

MPa and 200 MPa respectively. A factor of safety

of three is desired and the stress-concentration

factor of 2.84 may be assumed

Apply I

6.

The cylinder head of a 200 mm X 350 mm

compressor is secured by means of 12 studs of

rolled mild steel having yield point stress of 350

MPa and endurance limit of 240 MPa. The gas

pressure is 1.5 MPa. The initial tension in the

bolts, assumed to be equally loaded such that a

cylinder pressure of 3 MPa is required for the joint

to be on the point of opening. The joint is made

leak-proof by using copper gasket, which renders

the effect of external load to be half. Determine the

size of bolts, if factor of safety is 2 and stress

concentration factor is 2.8.

Evaluate H

7.

A circular shaft, 50mm in diameter, is welded to

the support by means of circumferential fillet

weld.it is subjected to torsional moment of 2500

N-m. Determine the size of the weld. If the

permissible shear stress in the weld is limited to

140N/mm2.

Apply J

8.

The load on a bolt consists of an axial pull of 10

kN. together with a transverseShear force of 5 kN.

Calculate the diameter of bolt required according

to 1. Maximum principal stress theory; 2.

Maximum shear stress theory; 3. Maximum

principalStrain theory; 4. Maximum strain energy

theory; and 5. Maximum distortion energy theory.

Take permissible tensile stress at elastic limit =

100 MPa and Poisson’s ratio = 0.3.

Apply E

9. Explain the advantages of welded joints over Apply B

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 189

riveted and bolted joints.

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 3

Short answer questions

1. Explain (i) parallel sunk key (ii)taper sunk key Remember A

2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of

Kennedy key? Give its applications?

Remember A

3. Explain Woodruff key with example? Apply D

4. Explain about standard taper for sunk key? Understand E

5. List out the various types of sunk keys. Understand B

6. Explain Kennedy key? Give its applications? Remember E

7. Write the effect of keyway cut into the shaft? Apply A

8. Differentiate between a cotter joint and a knuckle

joint?

Understand K

9. Write the advantages and disadvantages of saddle

key over flat key?

Remember D

10. Write the advantages and disadvantages of taper

key over parallel key?

Apply E

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 3

long answer questions

1.

Design and draw a cotter joint to support a load

varying from 3KN in compression to 4 KN in

tension. The material used in carbon steel for

which the following allowable stresses may be

used. The load is applied statistically. Tensile

stress = Compressive stress = 500N/mm2, shear

stress = 350 N/mm2, crushing stress = 900N/mm2.

Analyze M

2. Describe the purpose of gib in cotter joint. What

are the applications of cotter joint?

Apply A

3.

Design a knuckle joint to transmit 150KN.The

design stresses may be taken as 75Mpa in tension,

60Mpa in shear and 150Mpa in compression.

Analyze M

4. Describe the design procedure of a Gib and cotter

joint?

Apply B

5. What are the various types of keys? Discuss their

merits and demerits?

Apply B

6.

Design the rectangular key for a shaft of 50mm

diameter. The shearing and crushing stresses for

the key material are 42Mpa and 70Mpa.

Analyze M

7. A feather key is 12mm wide and is to transmit 700 Apply D

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 190

M-m torque from 400 mm diameter shaft. The

stress key has an allowable

stress in tension and compression of 120 MPa and

an allowable shear stress of 575 Mpa. Determine

the required length of key. If the key dimensions

are reversed as 9mm wide and 12mm deep, what

would have been the required length of key for

same load and material?

8.

Design a cotter joint to connect two mild steel rods

for a pull of 30 kN. The maximum permissible

stresses are 55 MPa in tension, 40MPa in shear

and 70Mpain crushing. Draw a neat sketch of the

joint designed.

Analyze M

9. Discuss classifications and applications of various

Keys?

Apply A

10.

Design a knuckle joint to withstand an axial load

of 70 kN. The eye end, fork end, and pin of the

joint are made of mild steel having permissible

stresses of 75 MPa in tension, 50 MPa in shear,

and 90 MPa in compression. Give a neat

dimensioned sketch of the joint.

Analyze M

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 4

Short long answer questions

1. Explain the terms (i) Rigid coupling (ii) Flange

coupling

Remember B

2. Write the advantages and disadvantages of rigid

coupling

Remember B

3. What is critical speed of a shaft? Remember A

4. Distinguish between coupling and clutch? Analyze E

5. Distinguish between protected and unprotected

rigid flange coupling?

Analyze I

6. What are splines? Where do you use it? Apply H

7. Give at least three practical applications of

couplings?

Understand A

8. Discuss equivalent torsional moment and

equivalent bending moment?

Apply B

9. Give two examples where hollow shafts are used? Understand D

10. Explain the permissible angle of twist for line

shafts?

Apply I

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 191

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 4

long answer questions

1.

Describe with the help of neat sketches, the types

of various shaft couplings also Mention the uses of

each type.

Understand E

2. Explain about the clamp or split muff coupling

with neat diagram?

Remember I

3.

Design and draw a protective type of cast iron

flange coupling for a steel shaft transmitting 15kw

at 200 r.p.m. and having an allowable shear stress

of 40mpa. The working stress in the bolts should

not exceed 30mpa. Assume that the same material

is used for shaft and key and that the crushing

stress is twice the value of its shear stress. The

maximum torque is 25% greater than the full load

torque. The shear stress for cast iron is 14mpa

Analyze M

4. Explain about the sleeve or muff coupling with

neat diagram?

Remember B

5.

A shaft made of mild steel is required to transmit

100kw at 300 r.p.m. the supported length of the

shaft is 3mts. It carries two pulleys each weighing

1500N supported at a distance of 1 mt from the

ends respectively. Assuming the safe value of

stress, Determine the diameter of the shaft.

Evaluate E

6.

A motor car shaft consists of a steel tube 30mm

internal diameter and 4mm thick the engine

develops 10kw at 2000r.p.m. Calculate the

maximum shear stress in the tube when the power

is transmitted through a 4:1 gearing.

Apply A

7.

A shaft running at 400r.p.m transmits 10kw.

Assuming shear stress in shaft as 40mpa Calculate

diameter of the shaft.

Apply A

8. Discuss the function of a coupling. Give at least

three practical applications.

Understand E

9. Explain various types of stresses induced in

shafts?

Remember D

10.

Design a clamp coupling to transmit 30KW at

100r.p.m. The allowable shear stress for the shaft

and key is 40Mpa and the number of bolts

connecting the two halves are six. The permissible

tensile stress for the belt is 70Mpa. The coefficient

of friction between the muff and shaft surface may

be taken as 0.3.

Analyze M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 192

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 5

Short answer questions

1. Explain the nip of leaf spring? Remember B

2. Define the function of a spring Remember B

3. Define spring and explain its types? Remember A

4. Define wahl factor and why is it used? Remember E

5. Explain the utility of the centre bolt, U-clamp,

rebound clip and camber in a leaf spring.

Remember I

6. Write two advantages and applications of

concentric springs?

Remember H

7. Discuss about surge in springs? Understand A

8. Define pulsating shear stress and why springs are

subjected to pulsating shear stress?

Remember B

9. What are active coils of springs? Remember D

10. Write the objective of nipping of leaf spring? Remember I

Sl.no Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

level

Course

outcomes

Unit 5

long answer questions

1. Discuss the materials and practical applications for

the various types of springs.

Remember D

2. Discuss the materials and practical applications for

the various types of springs?

Remember D

3.

Explain the following terms of the spring? (i)

Solid length (ii) free length (iii) Spring Index (iv)

Spring rate (v) Pitch

Apply E

4.

Find the maximum shear stress and deflection

induced in a helical spring of the following

specifications, if it has to absorb 1000N-M of

energy. Mean diameter of

spring=100mm;Diameter of steel wire, used for

making the spring =20mm; Number of coils=30;

Modulus of rigidity of steel =85KN/mm

Apply E

5.

Explain what you understand by A.M. Wahl’s

factor and state its importance in the design of

helical springs

Apply H

6.

A closely coiled helical spring is made of 10mm

diameter steel wire, the coil consisting of 10

complete turns with a mean diameter of 120mm.

the spring carries an axial pull of 200N.Determine

Evaluate M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 193

the shear stress induced in the spring neglecting the

effect of stress concentration. Determine also the

deflection in the spring, its stiffness and strain

energy stored by it if the modulus of rigidity of the

material is 80KN/mm².

7. Discuss the materials and practical applications for

the various types of springs?

Remember A

8.

Classify springs according to their shapes. Draw

neat sketches indicating in each case whether

stresses are induced by bending (or) by torsion?

Analyze M

9. Explain one method of avoiding the tendency of a

compression springs to buckle.

Apply B

10. State the importance in the design of helical

springs?

Analyze M

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 194

14.0 THERMAL ENGINEERING-II (A50326)

14.1 COURSE DESCRIPTION:

Course Code A50326

Course Title THERMAL ENGINEERING – II

Course Structure Lectures Tutorials Practicals Credits

5 1 - 4

Course Coordinator N. Prabhu Kishore, Asst.Professor

Team of Instructors Venu Gopal, Asst Professor

COURSE OVERVIEW: The subject, “Thermal Engineering-II” is designed to cover many important applications of thermodynamics. The subject Thermal Engineering-II is the advanced course of thermodynamic application hence it calls for the study of basic thermodynamics apart from basic science subjects like physics, math and to some extent the chemistry. The first step is to understand the rankine cycle and the methods to improve the efficiency of the rankine cycle. We learn the principle of boilers and classification of boilers. The main important concept is steam turbines which helps us to learn velocity triangles of impulse and reaction turbines. Gas turbines are the one which are used in jet propulsion. So we will learn in detail about classification of gas turbines. In this we also learn basic concept of jet propulsion and rockets.

14.2 PREREQUISITES:

Level Credits Periods/Weeks Prerequisites

UG 4 4

1. Should have knowledge on history and evolution of aircrafts. 2. Knowledge on basic aircraft and its components 3. Should be thorough with Aerodynamics, propulsion systems and flight mechanics of aircraft. 4. Basic idea about space environment and satellites launched 5. Basic idea about space shuttles and missions

14.3 MARKS DISTRIBUTIONS:

Session Marks (25M) University End

Exam Marks

Total

Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests (Midterm tests):

There shall be 2 midterm examinations. Each midterm

examination consists of one objective paper, one

75 100

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 195

subjective paper and four assignments. The objective

paper is for 10 marks and subjective paper is for 10

marks, with duration of 1 hour 20 minutes (20 minutes for

objective and 60 minutes for subjective paper).

Objective paper is set for 20 bits of – multiple choice

questions, fill-in the blanks, 10 marks. Subjective paper

contains of 4 full questions (one from each unit) of

which, the student has to answer 2 questions, each

question carrying 5 marks. First midterm examination

shall be conducted for 2.5 units of syllabus and second

midterm examination shall be conducted for another 2.5

units. 5 marks are allocated for Assignments. First two

assignments should be submitted before the

conduct of the first mid, and the second two assignments

should be submitted before the conduct of the second mid.

The total marks secured by the student in each midterm

examination are evaluated for 25 marks, and the average

of the two midterm examinations shall be taken as the

final marks secured by each candidate.

14.4 EVALUATION SCHEME:

S. No Component Duration Marks

1 I Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

2 I Assignment 5

3 II Mid Examination 1 hour and 20 min 20

4 II Assignment 5

MID Examination marks to be considered as average of above 2 MID’s

5 External Examination 3 hours 75

Total 75

COURSE OBJECTIVES: The basic objective of the subject is to learn the fundamentals of the thermodynamic cycles utilized for steam generators, steam turbines, gas turbines and its application. It also facilitates to know the fundamentals and basic principles, of major components of steam power plants and other turbo machinery and their applications. The subject is divided into five units to deal it conveniently. The unit one, exhaustively deals with basic concepts, thermodynamic cycle and analysis. It also deals fundamentals of fuels and their combustion. Steam generators including high pressure boilers, their mountings and accessories are dealt in unit two. Steam nozzle a major component in steam generators are dealt in unit two. It deals with velocity, discharge, flow types, in the steam nozzle application. The unit three deals with steam turbines working principle, classifications condition for maximum efficiency and compounding are dealt. Unit three mainly focuses on reaction turbines. In Unit three the steam condensers are dealt, classification, Principle efficiency, air leakage, air pump are mentioned for study. The unit four mainly focuses on as turbines it covers, simple gas power plant, ideal cycle, basic components, compressors, combustion chambers and turbines are be studied. The Unit five deals with jet propulsion. The basic concepts of thrust, thrust power, propulsion efficiency are to be focused.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 196

The jet engines, turbo jet engines, rockets, impulse solid and liquid propellant rocket engines are also to be dealt exhaustively. Upon completion of the course, students should understand the following: 1. Understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics 2. Understand the combustion and fuels 3. Understand the working principle of boilers 4. Explain the function of nozzles 5. Understand the working of steam turbines and reaction turbines 6. Understand the principles of steam condensers 7. Understand the working of gas turbines 8. Explain the jet propulsion types 9. Understand the concept of rockets

14.5 COURSE OUTCOMES:

This course uses lectures, assignments and home works to the students. The teaching methods include regular class work, Problem solving, technical quiz, and seminars to enable the students: a) To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle b) To understand about the fuels and combustion c) To understand and classify boilers d) To study and apply the principle of nozzle e) To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines f) To classify, explain and understand gas turbines g) To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

14.6 HOW PROGRAM OUTCOMES ARE ASSESSED:

Program Outcomes Level Proficiency

assessed by

a

An ability to apply knowledge of computing, mathematical

foundations, algorithmic principles, and computer science and

engineering theory in the modeling and design of computer-

based systems to real-world problems (fundamental

engineering analysis skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

b An ability to design and conduct experiments, as well as to

analyze and interpret data (information retrieval skills) H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

c

An ability to design , implement, and evaluate a computer-

based system, process, component, or program to meet desired

needs, within realistic constraints such as economic,

environmental, social, political, health and safety,

manufacturability, and sustainability (Creative Skills)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

d An ability to function effectively on multi-disciplinary teams

(team work) N --

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 197

e

An ability to analyze a problem, identify, formulate and use

the appropriate computing and engineering requirements for

obtaining its solution (engineering problem solving skills)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

f

An understanding of professional, ethical, legal, security and

social

issues and responsibilities (professional integrity)

N --

g

An ability to communicate effectively both in writing and

orally

(speaking / writing skills)

N --

h

The broad education necessary to analyze the local and global

impact of computing and engineering solutions on individuals,

organizations, and society (engineering impact assessment

skills)

N --

i

Recognition of the need for, and an ability to engage in

continuing

professional development and life-long learning (continuing

education awareness)

H

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

j A Knowledge of contemporary issues (social awareness) N --

k

An ability to use current techniques, skills, and tools necessary

for

computing and engineering practice (practical engineering

analysis

skills)

N --

l

An ability to apply design and development principles in the

construction of software and hardware systems of varying

complexity (software hardware interface)

S

Assignments

Midterm and

University

examinations

m

An ability to recognize the importance of professional

development by pursuing postgraduate studies or face

competitive examinations that offer challenging and rewarding

careers in computing (successful career and immediate

employment).

N --

N=None S=Supportive H=Highly Related

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 198

14.7 JNTUH SYLLABUS: UNIT - I: Basic Concepts: Rankine cycle - Schemantic layout, Thermodynamic Analysis, Concept of Mean Temperature of Heat addition, Methods to improve cycle performance - Regeneration & reheating. Combustion: Fuels and combustion- concept of heat of reaction-adiabatic flame temperaturestoichiometry-flue gas analysis. UNIT - II: Boilers: Classification - Working principles with sketches including H.P. Boilers - Mountings and Accessories - Working principle. Steam Nozzles: Function of nozzle - Applications and Types- Flow through nozzlesThermodynamic analysis. UNIT - III: Steam Turbines: Classification - Impulse turbine; Mechanical details - Velocity diagram - Effect of friction - Power developed, Axial thrust, Blade or diagram efficiency - Condition for maximum efficiency. Reaction Turbine: Mechanical details - Principle of operation, Thermodynamic analysis of a stage, Degree of reaction - Velocity diagram - Parson's reaction turbine - Condition for maximum efficiency. Steam Condensers: Requirements of steam condensing plant - Classification of condensers - Working principle of different types. UNIT - IV: Gas Turbines: Simple gas turbine plant - Ideal cycle, essential components - Parameters of performance - Actual cycle - Regeneration, Inter cooling and Reheating - Closed and Semi - closed cycles - merits and Demerits - Brief Concepts about compressors- Combustion chambers and turbines of Gas Turbine plant. UNIT - V: Jet Propulsion: Principle of Operation - Classification of jet propulsive engines - Working Principles with schemantic diagrams and representation on T-S diagram- Thrust, Thrust Power and Propulsion Efficiency - Turbo jet engines - Needs and Demands met by Turbo jet - Schemantic Diagram, Thermodynamic Cycle, Performance Evaluation Thrust Argumentation - Methods. Rockets: Application - Working Principle - Classification - Propellant Type - Thrust, Propulsive Efficiency - Specific Impulse - Solid and Liquid propellant Rocket Engines. TEXT BOOKS: 1. Thermal Engineering / Rajput / Lakshmi Publications. 2. Gas Turbines / V. Ganesan / TMH. REFERENCES BOOKS: 1. Gas Turbines and Propulsive Systems / P. Khajuria & S.P. Dubey / Dhanapatrai Pub. 2. Thermal Engineering / Ballaney / Khanna Pub. 3. Gas Turbines / Cohen, Rogers and Saravana Muttoo / Addison Wesley - Longman. 4. Thermal Engineering / R.S. Khurmi & J.S. Gupta / S. Chand Pub. 5. Thermodynamics and Heat Engines / R. Yadav / Central Book Depot. 6. Thermal Engineering / Ajoy Kumar / Narosa.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 199

14.8 COURSE PLAN:

LECTU

R E

NO

COURSE LEARNING OUTCOMES

TEXT/REF

BOOK

L1

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Introduction to the subject,Basic Concepts

T1

L2

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Rankine cycle - Schematic layout,

T1

L3

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Thermodynamic Analysis

L4

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Concept of Mean, Temperature of

Heat addition

T1

L5

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Methods to improve cycle

performance

T1

L6

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Regeneration

R4

L7

To describe the basic concepts of rankine cycle

Reheating

R4

L8 To understand about the fuels and combustion

Combustion: fuels and combustion, R4

L9

To understand about the fuels and combustion

Concepts of heat of reaction and Adiabatic Flame Temperature,

R4

L10 To understand about the fuels and combustion

Stoichiometry and Flue gas analysis R4

L11

To understand about the fuels and combustion

problems R4

L12

To understand and classify boilers

Boilers : Classification – Working principles – with sketches

including , H.P.Boilers

T1

L13

To understand and classify boilers

Mountings and Accessories –

Working principles

T1

L14

To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Steam Nozzles : Function of nozzle

– applications & types

T1

L15 To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Flow through nozzles T1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 200

L16 To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Thermodynamic analysis T1

L17 To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Problems Related To The Unit T1

L18 To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Problems Related To The Unit T1

L19 To study and apply the principle of nozzle

Problems Related To The Unit R4

L20

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Steam Turbines : Classification – Impulse turbine;

T1

L21

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Mechanical details – Velocity

diagram – effect of friction

T1

L22

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Power developed, axial thrust,

blade or diagram efficiency

T1

L23

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Condition for maximum efficiency.

T1

L24

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Problems Related To The Unit T1

L25

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Problems Related To The Unit T1

L26

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Reaction Turbine : Mechanical

details – principle of operation

T1

L27

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Thermodynamic analysis of a

stage, degree of reaction –

velocity diagram

T1

L28

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Parson’s reaction turbine

T1

L29

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Condition for maximum efficiency.

R4

L30

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Solving the Problems Related

to the topic

R4

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 201

L31

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Solving the Problems Related

to the topic

R4

L32

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Steam Condensers :

Requirements of steam

condensing plant

R4

L33

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Classification of condensers –

working principle of different

types.

R4

L34

To understand, explain and classify about the impulse and reaction turbines

Problems solving related to the

topic

R4

L35

To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Gas Turbines : Simple gas turbine plant – Ideal cycle,

essential components

T1

L36

To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

parameters of performance – actual cycle

R4

L37 To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Regeneration T1

L38 To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Inter Cooling T1

L39 To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Reheating T1

L40

To classify, explain and understand gas turbine

Closed and Semi-closed cycles –

merits and demerits,

T1

L41

To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Brief concepts about compressors, combustion chambers and turbines

of Gas Turbine Plant.

T1

L42 To classify, explain and understand gas turbines

Problems solving related to the

topic T1

L43

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Jet Propulsion : Principle of

Operation –

T1

L44 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Classification of jet propulsive

engines T1

L45

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Working Principles with schematic diagrams

T1

L47 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Thrust, Thrust Power T1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 202

L48 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Propulsion Efficiency Turbo jet

engines T1

L49 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Needs and Demands met by Turbo

jet T1

L50

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Schematic Diagram,

Thermodynamic Cycle,

T1

L51

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Performance Evaluation Thrust Augmentation – Methods.

T1

L52

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Rockets : Applications and

Working Principle,Classification and

Propellant Type

T1

L53 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Classification and Propellant Type T1

L54

To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Thrust, Propulsive and Efficiency

of Engines. Specific Impulse and

Solid propellant Rocket

Engines

T1

L55 To integrate the basic concepts of Propulsion

Liquid propellant Rocket Engines T1

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 203

14. 9 MAPPING COURSE OBJECTIVES LEADING

TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES: Course Objectives

Program

outcomes a b c d e f g h i j k l m

1. H S S H

2. S H H S S

3. H

4. H S H S 5. S H S

6. S 7. H S

8. H S

9. S H H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

1 4 . 1 0 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING

TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES:

Course Outcomes

Program

outcomes a b c d e f g h i j k l m

1.

2. S S S

3. H H H

4. H

5.

6. S S

7. S S S

8. H H H

9. S H

S = Supportive H = Highly Related

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 204

14.11 OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS:

UNIT-I

1) Steam power plants are _combustion plants (a)

(A) External (B) Internal

(C) either A or B (D) None

2) Work output due to super heating (a)

(A) Increases (B) Decreases

(C) Remain same (D) None

3) Reheat cycle efficiency is ranking cycle (b)

(A) More than (B) Less than (C) Equal

to (D) None

4) Actual temperature in combustion is than adiabatic flame Temperature(a)

(A) Less (B) More

(C) Equal (D) None

5) The ideal cycle on which steam engine works, is (b)

(A) Carnot cycle (B) Rankine cycle

(C) Otto cycle (D) Joule cycle

6) Rankine cycle comprises (c)

(A) two isothermal and two isentropics (B) two isobarics and two isothermals

(C) two isobarics and two isoentropics (D) two isothermals and two isochorics

7) The Rankine cycle with super heated steam (d)

(A) the workdone increases (B) the dryness fraction increases

(C) steam steam consumption decreases (D) all the above

8) The rankine cycle as compared to carnot cycle, has ................work ratio (a)

(A) high (B) low

(C) same (D) none

9) In the operation of steam engines, the vapour cycle adopted is (c)

(A) carnot cycle (B) rankine cycle

(C) modified ranikine cycle (D) regenerative cycle

10) Rankine cycle efficiency of a good steam power plant may be in the range of (b)

(A) 15% to 20% (B) 35% to 45% (

C) 70% to (D) 90% to 95%

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 205

11) Rankine cycle efficiency on low pressure limit of p1 and high pressure limit of p2 (a)

A) has higher thermal efficiency than the carnot cycle operating between same pressure

limits

B) has lower thermal efficiency than the carnot cycle operating between same pressure

limits

C) has same thermal efficiency as carnot cycle operating between same pressure limits

D) may be more or less depending upon the magnitudes of p1 and p2

12) Rankine cycle efficiency of a steam power plant (b)

A) Improves in summer as compared to that in winter

B) Improves in winter as compared to that in summer

C) is unaffected by climatic conditions

D) none of the above

13) Rankine cycle comprises of (b)

A) two isentropic processes and two constant volume processes B)

two isentropic processes and two constant pressure processes C)

two isothermal processes and two constant pressure processes D)

none of the above

14) In rankine cycle the work output from the turbine is given by

(b)

A) Change in internal energy between inlet and outlet

B) change in enthalpy between inlet and outlet

C) change in entropy between inlet and outlet

D) change in temperature between inlet and outlet

15) Regenerative heating i.e., bleeding steam to reheat feed water to boiler (b)

A) Decreases thermal efficiency of the cycle

B) Increases thermal efficiency of the cycle

C) Does not affect thermal efficiency of the cycle

D) may increase or decrease thermal efficiency of the cycle

16) Regenerative cycle thermal efficiency (a)

A) is always greater than simple rankine thermal efficiency

B) is greater than simple rankine cycle thermal efficiency only when steam is bled at

perticular pressure

C) is same as simple rankine cycle thermal efficiency

D) is always less than simple rankine cycle thermal efficiency

17) In a regenerative feed heating cycle, the optimum value of the fraction of steam extracted

for feed heating (b)

A) Decrease with increase in rankine cycle efficiency B)

Increases with increase in rankine cycle efficiency C) Is

unaffected by increase in rankine cycle efficiency D)

none of the above

18) In regenerative feed heating cycle, the greatest economy is affected (b)

A) When steam is extracted from only one suitable point of steam turbine

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 206

B) When steam is extracted from several places in different stages of steam turbine

C) When steam is extracted from the last stage of steam turbine

D) none of the above

19) The maximum percentage gain in regenerative feed heating cycle thermal efficiency(a)

A) Increases with number of feed heaters increasing

B) Decreases with number of feed heaters increasing

C) remains same unaffected by number of feed heaters

D) none of the above

20) The ratio of thermal efficiency to the rankine cycle efficiency is known as (d)

A) work ratio

B) specific steam consumption

C) effectiveness

D) efficiency ratio

UNIT-II

1) The mass of flue gas per kg of fuel is the ratio of (c)

A) mass of oxygen in 1 kg of flue gas to the mass of oxygen in 1 kg of fuel

B) mass of oxygen in 1 kg of fuel to the mass of oxygen in 1 kg of flue gas C) mass of carbon in 1 kg of flue gas to the mass of carbon in 1 kg of flue gas

D) mass of carbon in 1 kg of fuel to the mass of carbon in 1 kg of flue gas

2) One kg of carbon monoxide requires 4/7 kg of oxygen and produces (c)

A) 11/3 kg of CO2

B) 7/3 kg of CO C) 11/7 kg of CO2

D) 8/3 kg of CO

3) One kg of carbon requires .........of oxygen and produces 7/3 kg of carbon monoxide (a) A) 4/3 B) 7/3

C) 8/3 D) 11/3

4) One kg of ethylene (C2H4) requires 2 kg of oxygen and produces 22/7 kg of carbon dioxide

and (a)

A) 9/7 kg of water B) 11/7 kg of water

C) 7/4 kg of water D) 11/4 kg of water

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 207

5) Lancashire boiler is a (d)

A) stationary fire tube boiler B) internally fired boiler

C) horizontal boiler D) none of the above

6) The diameter of internal flue tubes of a Lancashire boiler is about.....that of its shall (c)

A) one fourth B) one third

C) two fourth D) one half

7) Which of the following is a water tube boiler (b)

A) Lancashire boiler B) Bobcock and wilcox boiler

C) Locomotive boiler D) Cochran boiler

8) Which of the following boiler is best suited to meet the fluctuating demand of steam (a)

A) Locomotive boiler B) Lancashire boiler

C) Cornish D) Bobcock and wilcox boiler

9) Locomotive boiler is a _______________ (c)

A) Single tube, horizontal ,internally fired and stationary boiler

B) Single tube, vertical, externally fired and stationary boiler

C) multi tubular, horizontal ,internally fired and mobile boiler

D) multi tubular, horizontal ,externally fired and stationary boiler

10) is a vertical boiler (a)

A) Cochran B) Lancashire

C) Cornish D) Babcock Wilcox Boiler

11) Which of the following is high pressure boiler (c)

A) Cochran B) Lancashire

C) La-mout D) Babcock Wilcox Boiler

12) is fitted above the combustion chamber (c)

A) Blow off cock B) Stop valve

C) Fusible Plug D) feed check valve

13) Draught is obtained by chimney (a)

A) Natural B) Induced

C) Forced D) Mechanical

14) Artificial Draught is normally designed to produce (b)

A) Less smoke B) more draught

C) less chimney gas temperature D)all the above

15) For maximum discharge of hot gases through the chimney the height of hot gas column

producing draught is (b)

A) twice the height of chimney B) equal the height of chimney

C) half the height of chimney D) none of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 208

16) In balanced draught system the pressure at force fan inlet (c)

A) is greater than pressure at chimney outlet

B) is less than pressure at chimney outlet

C) approximately same as that at chimney outlet

D) none of the above

17. The expansion of steam in a nozzle ____________ (adiabatic expansion)

18. The area keep on decreasing in _____________ types of nozzle (convergent)

19. The area keep on increasing in _____________ types of nozzle (divergent)

20. The area remains constant at ______________ (throat)

UNIT-III

1) A steam nozzle converts (a)

A)heat energy of steam into kinetic energy

B) kinetic energy into heat energy of steam

C) heat energy of steam into potential energy

D) potential energy of steam into heat energy of steam

2) The expansion of steam in a nozzle follows (b)

A) carnot cycle B) Rankine cycle C) joule cycle

D) stirling cycle

3) The flow through a nozzle is regarded as (d)

A) constant volume flow B) constant pressure flow C) isothermal flow

D) isentropic flow

4) The variation of steam pressure in the nozzle depends upon (d)

A) velocity of steam

B)specific volume of steam C) dryness fraction of steam D) all the above

5) The nozzle is said to be a convergent nozzle (b)

A) when the cross section of the nozzle increases continuously from entrance to exit

B) when the cross section of the nozzle decreases continuously from entrance to exit

C) when the cross section of the nozzle first decreases from entrance to throat and

then increases from its throat to exit

D) none of the above

6) The nozzle is said to divergent nozzle (a)

A) when the cross section of the nozzle increases continuously from entrance to exit

B) when the cross section of the nozzle decreases continuously from entrance to exit

C) when the cross section of the nozzle first decreases from entrance to throat and

then increases from its throat to exit

D) none of the above

7) When the cross section of a nozzle increases continuously from entrance to exit, it is called

as (a)

A) divergent nozzle

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 209

B) convergent nozzle

C) convergent - divergent nozzle

D) none of the above

8) The steam enters the nozzle at a (a)

A) high pressure and a low velocity

B) high pressure and a high velocity

C) low pressure and a low velocity

D) low pressure and a high velocity

9) The steam leaves the nozzle at a (d)

A) high pressure and a low velocity B)

high pressure and a high velocity C)

low pressure and a low velocity D) low

pressure and a high velocity

10) The ratio of the useful heat drop to isentropic heat drop is called (b)

A) condenser efficiency

B) nozzle efficiency

C) boiler efficiency

D) vacuum efficiency

11) In a nozzle whole fractional loss is assumed to occur between (c)

A) inlet and throat B)

inlet and outlet C)

throat and exit D) all

the above

12) The effect of friction on the flow of steam through a nozzle is (c)

A) decreases the mass flow rate and to increase the wetness of steam

B) increases the mass flow rate and to increase the exit temperature

C) decreases the mass flow rate and to decrease the wetness of steam

D) decreases the exit temperature without any effect on mass flow rate

13) The critical pressure gives the velocity of steam at the throat (a)

A) equal to the velocity of sound

B) less than the velocity of sound C)

more than the velocity of sound D)

none of these

14) The maximum discharge of steam through a convergent-divergent nozzle depends upon

(d)

A) area of nozzle at throat

B) initial pressure and volume of steam

C) final pressure of steam leaving the nozzle

D) both (a) and (b)

15) The critical pressure ratio for steam is 0.546, then the steam is initially (c)

A) wet steam

B) dry saturated steam C)

super heated steam D) none

of these

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 210

16) The difference of super saturated temperature and saturation temperature at that pressure is

called (c)

A) degree of super saturation

B) degree of super heat

C) degree of under cooling

D) none of these

17. The example of a velocity compounding turbine is ___________(Curtis)

18. The example of a pressure compounding turbine is ___________(Rateau)

19. The expansion in impulse turbine takes place only in __________(nozzles)

20. The expansion in reaction turbines takes place in ______________ (both fixed and moving

blades)

UNIT-IV

1) In an impulse, steam expands (a)

A) only in blades

B) only in nozzle

C) partly in the nozzle and partly in the blades

D) none of these

2) DE-leval turbine is a (a)

A) simple impulse turbine B)

simple reaction turbine C)

impulse-reaction turbine D)

none of these

3) In turbines, the fluid undergoes a continuous steady flow process and the speed of flow is (d)

A)low

B) very low

C)high

D) very high

4) In an impulse turbine (a)

A) the steam is expanded in nozzle only and there is a pressure drop and heat drop

B) the steam is expanded both in fixed and moving blades continuously

C) the steam is expended in moving blades only

D) the pressure and temperature of steam remains constant

5) De-leval turbine is mostly used (d)

A) where low speeds are required

B) for small power purposes and low speeds

C) for large power purposes

D) for small power purposes and high speeds

6) In an ideal impulse turbine, the (b)

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 211

A) absolute velocity at the inlet of moving blade is equal to that at the outlet

B) relative velocity at the inlet of the moving blade is equal to that at the outlet

C) axial velocity at inlet is equal to that at the outlet

D) whirl velocity at inlet is equal to that at the outlet

7) The blade fraction in the impulse reduces the velocity of steam by................while it is

passes over the blades (a)

A) 10 to 15 % B) 15 to 20 % C) 20 to 30 % D) 30 to 40 %

8) The action of steam in a steam turbine is (b)

A) static

B) dynamic

C) static and dynamic

D) neither static nor dynamic

9) Which one of the statement is correct for steam turbines as compared to reciprocating steam

engines (d)

A) a steam turbine develops higher speeds

B) the efficiency of steam turbine is higher

C) the steam consumption is less

D) all of these

10) De-leval turbine is (a)

A) single rotor impulse turbine B) multi rotor impulse turbine C) impulse reaction

turbine

D) none of these

11) Steam turbines are used for (d)

A) large marine propulsion

B) electric power generation

C) direct drive of fans, compressors ,pumps

D) all of these

12) In impulse turbines, when friction is neglected, the relative velocity of steam at outlet tip of

the blade is .........the relative velocity of steam at inlet tip of the blade (a)

A) equal to

B) less than

C) greater than

D) none of these

13) .................. is done to reduce the rotor speed of the impulse turbine (a)

A)compounding

B)super heating C)

sub cooling

D)condesing

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 212

14) In ............. turbine the steam is expanded in both fixed and moving blades continuously

while the stem passes over them (c)

A) impulse

B) super heated

C) impulse-reaction

D) sub cooled

15) A single stage impulse turbine with a diameter of 1.2 m runs at 3000 rpm. If the blade speed

ratio is 0.42, then the inlet velocity of steam will be (c)

A) 79 m/s B) 188 m/s C)450 m/s D)900 m/s

16. Gas turbine follows the ___________ cycle (brayton)

17. The compressed air may be used (d)

A.in gas turbine plants

B.for operating pneumatic drills

C.in starting and supercharging of I.C. engines

D.all of the above

18. The maximum temperature in a gas turbine is (c)

A.200°C

B.500°C

C.700°C

D.1000°C

19. An open cycle gas turbine works on the same cycle as that of a closed cycle gas turbine. (a)

A.Yes

B.No

20. The capacity of a compressor is expressed in (c)

A.kg/m2

B.kg/m3

C.m3/min

D.m3/kg

UNIT-V

1. A rocket works with maximum overall efficiency when air-craft velocity is __________ the

jet velocity. (b)

A.equal to

B.one-half

C.Double

2. In a jet propulsion (b)

A.the propulsive matter is ejected from within the propelled body

B.the propulsive matter is caused to flow around the propelled body

C.its functioning does not depend upon presence of air

D.none of the above

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 213

3.The ratio of workdone per cycle to the stroke volume of the compressor is known as (d)

A.compressor capacity

B.compression ratio

C.compressor efficiency

D.mean effective pressure

4. Turbo jet engine is an air breathing engine

5. ________________ engine is not having a compressor (ramjet)

6. _________________engine principle is used in flying bombs(pulsejet)

7. Propellent is defined as mixture of _______________(fuel N oxidizer)

8. _____________engines are non air breathing engine(rockets)

9. Propellents are further classified as ________________(solid and liquid propellents)

10. Parson's turbine is a (B)

A.simple impulse turbine

B.simple reaction turbine

C.impulse-reaction turbine

D.none of these

11.Parson's reaction turbine is a __________ reaction turbine.(50%)

12.The value of the reheat factor varies from (A)

A.1.02 to 1.06

B.1.08 to 1.l0

C.1.2 to 1.6

D.1.6 to 2

13. The turbine blades are (c)

A.Straight

B.Circular

C.Curved

14. When the back pressure of a nozzle is below the designed value of pressure at exit of nozzle,

the nozzle is said to be (b)

A.Choked

B.Underdamping

C.Overdamping

D.none of these

15. The discharge is __________ at critical pressure.(maximum)

16. Thermal equilibrium means that the flow of steam is _______________ (isentrophic)

17. The efficiency of reaction turbine is maximum when (where α = Angle made by the absolute

velocity (V) at inlet) (b)

A.Vb = 0.5 V cos α

B.Vb = V cos α

C.Vb = 0.5 V2 cos α

D.Vb = V2 cos α

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 214

18. De-Laval turbine is a (a)

A.single rotor impulse turbine

B.multi-rotor impulse turbine

C.impulse reaction turbine

D.none of these

19. In a nozzle, whole frictional loss is assumed to occur between (c)

A.inlet and thoroat

B.inlet and outlet

C.throat and exit

D.all of these

20. The critical pressure ratio for initially wet steam is (c)

A.0.546 B.

0.577

C.0.582

D.0.601

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 215

14. 12 TUTORIAL QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 Discuss shortly on flue gas analysis Knowledge A

2 Discuss shortly on regenerative cycle Knowledge B

3 Explain the methods of increasing the thermal

efficiency of Rankin cycle Knowledge E

4 Explain the adiabatic flame temperature? Knowledge C

5 Define rankine cycle Remember A

6 Define reheating cycle Remember A

7 Discuss the different operations in rankine cycle Knowledge A

8 Determine is the efficiency of rankine cycle Analysis A

9 Difference between rankine and carnot cycle Analysis A

10 Discuss the different methods to improve performance

of rankine cycle Knowledge B

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

During a boiler trial, the dry flue gas analysis by

volume was repeated as CO2=13%, CO=0.3%,

O2=6%, N2=80.7% . The coal analysis by mass was

reported as C=62.4%, H2 =4.2%, O2=4.5 %,

Moisture=15%, Ash=13.9%. Calculate: i) Minimum

air required to burn one Kg of coal. ii) Mass of air

actually supplied per Kg of coal

Apply A

2

A steam boiler uses pulverized coal in the furnace.

The ultimate analysis of coal (By mass) as received is

C=78%, H2=3%, O2=3%,S=1%, Ash=10%, and

moisture = 5%, Excess air supplied is 30%. Calculate

the mass of air to the supplied and mass of gaseous

product formed per Kg of Coal burnt.

Apply A

3

A 35KW (IP) System engines consumes 284Kg/h at

15bar and 250o C. If condenser pressure is 0.14bar,

Determine: i) Final condition of steam\ ii) Rankine

efficiency iii) Relative efficiency.

Analysis A

4 In a Rankin cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is Apply b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 216

saturated at a pressure of 35bar, and the exhaust

pressure is 0.2bar. Calculate i) The pump work ii)

Turbine work iii) Rankine efficiency.

5

Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal

reheat Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure

turbine at 15 MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the

condenser at a pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture

content of the steam at the exit of the low-pressure

turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the

pressure at which the steam should be reheated(b) the

thermal efficiency of the cycle.Assume the steam is

reheated to the inlet temperature of the high-pressure

turbine.

Analysis A

6

Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal

Rankine cycle.Steam enters the turbine at 3 MPa and

350°C and is condensed in thecondenser at a pressure

of 10 kPa. Determine(a) The thermal efficiency of

this power plant(b) The thermal efficiency if steam is

superheated to 600°C instead of 350°C(c) The thermal

efficiency if the boiler pressure is raised to 15 MPa

while the turbine inlet temperature is maintained at

600°C. 334 373 430

Analysis B

7

Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal

reheat Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure

turbine at 15 MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the

condenser at a pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture

content of the steam at the exit of the low-pressure

turbineis not to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the

pressure at which the steam should be reheated(b) the

thermal efficiency of the cycle. Assume the steam is

reheated to the inlet temperature of the high-pressure

turbine.

Analysis E

8

Consider a steam power plant that operates on an ideal

reheat–regenerative Rankinecycle with one open

feedwater heater, one closed feedwater heater, and

one reheater.Steam enters the turbine at 15 MPa and

600°C and is condensed in the condenser at apressure

of 10 kPa. Some steam is extracted from the turbine at

4 MPa for the closedfeedwater heater, and the

remaining steam is reheated at the same pressure to

600°C.The extracted steam is completely condensed

in the heater and is pumped to 15 MPabefore it mixes

with the feedwater at the same pressure. Steam for the

openfeedwater heater is extracted from the low-

pressure turbine at a pressure of0.5 MPa.Determine,

a) the fractions of steam extracted from the turbine b)

Analysis C

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 217

the thermal efficiency of the cycle

9

A steam power plant operates on the reheatRankine

cycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5

Mpa and 550°C at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2

MPa. Steamis then reheated at constant pressure

to450°C before it expands in the low-pressureturbine.

The isentropic efficiencies of theturbine and the pump

are 85 percent and 90percent, respectively. Steam

leaves thecondenser as a saturated liquid. If

themoisture content of the steam at the exit ofthe

turbine is not to exceed 5percent, determine(a) the

condenser pressure(b) the net power output(c) the

thermal efficiency Answers: (a) 9.73 kPa, (b) 10.2

MW, (c) 36.9 percent

Analysis a

10

Consider a steam power plant operating on theideal

regenerative Rankine cycle with one openfeedwater

heater. Steam enters the turbine at15 MPa and 600°C

and is condensed in thecondenser at a pressure of 10

kPa. Some steamleaves the turbine at a pressure of 1.2

MPa andenters the open feedwater heater. Determine

the fraction of steam extracted from the turbineand the

thermal efficiency of the cycle.

Analysis A

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 When a nozzle is said to be a convergent nozzle? Analysis B

2 When a turbine is said to have an axial discharge? comprehension A

3 How The flow through a nozzle is regarded ? comprehension B

4 In the absence of steam flow meter, suggest a method

by which steam quantity can be assessed in a boiler. Analysis E

5 List out the merits and demerits of direct method of

boiler efficiency. Knowledge B

6

In the indirect method of boiler efficiency evaluation,

list any two additional losses computed for solid fuel

fired boilers as compared to liquid and gas fired

boilers?

comprehension A

7 What are the main losses which are not accounted in

an indirect method of boiler efficiency testing? Analysis B

8 In the absence of data for evaluation of surface heat

loss of boiler, what percentage value can be assumed Knowledge E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 218

for the following three categories of boilers?

a Industrial fire tube / packaged boiler

b Industrial water tube boiler

c Power station boiler

9 Define evaporation ratio. Knowledge A

10 State two causes for rise in exit flue gas temperature in

a boiler Knowledge A

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 With a neat sketch explain the working principle of

Babcock and Wilcox boiler Analysis B

2

A boiler uses 18kg air per kg of fuel. Determine the

min height of the chimney required to produce a

draught of 25mm of water. The mean temperature of

chimney gases is 3150C and that of outside air is

270C

comprehension A

3 Discuss what are the boiler accessories comprehension B

4

The following readings were recorded during a 2

hour boiler trial on a boiler: Feed water supplied:

14000 kg Boiler working pressure: 10 bar Dryness

fraction of the steam: 0.96 Temperature of feed water

entering Economizer: 350C Temperature of feed

water leaving Economizer: 900C Temperature of

steam leaving super heater : 250 0 c Coal burnt :

1500 kg Calorific value of the coal : 33500 kJ/kg

Conduct Boiler Trial based on the data. Also evaluate

the overall efficiency of the boiler. Also evaluate the

equivalent evaporation from and at 1000C.

Analysis E

5 Draw neat sketch of Benson Boiler and Explain

briefly Knowledge B

6 List out mountings and explain briefly. comprehension B

7

For the evaluation of boiler efficiency by direct

method, describe how the heat input can be a

quantified for the following three cases:

• Gaseous fuels

• Liquid fuels

• Solid fuels

Analysis A

8 List out the major factors which affect the boiler Knowledge B

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 219

performance.

9 List out different temperatures to be measured during

the boiler (steam generation) audit Knowledge E

10

The measured parameters of paper industry boiler is

given below: Fuel analysis Ash content in fuel :

8.63% Moisture in coal : 31.6% Carbon content :

41.65% Hydrogen content : 2.0413% Nitrogen

content : 1.6% Oxygen content : 14.48% GCV of

coal : 3501 kcal/kg Useful data Theoretical air

requirement : 4.84 kg/kg of coal Theoretical CO2% :

20.67% Specific heat of air : 0.24 kcal/kg °C

Ambient air temp : 30 °C Boiler efficiency : 82%

Coal consumption/per hr : 12 TPH i. Estimate the

heat loss due to air infiltration. ii. Estimate heat loss

quantity as percentage of fuel input

Knowledge B

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 What is a stage in a steam turbine?. Knowledge B

2 What is a diaphragm? Knowledge E

3 What is a radial-flow turbine? Analysis B

4 What are four types of turbine seals? comprehension A

5 In which turbine is tip leakage a problem? comprehension B

6 What are two types of clearance in a turbine? Knowledge E

7 What are four types of thrust hearings? Knowledge B

8 What is the function of a thrust bearing? Analysis E

9 What is a balance piston? Analysis B

10 Why should a steam or moisture separator be

installed in the steam line next to a steam turbine? Knowledge A

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1

Dry saturated steam at 10bar is expanded isentropically

in a nozzle to 0.1bar. find the dryness fraction of the

steam at exit. Also Calculate the velocity of steam

leaving the nozzle. When a) Initial velocity is

negligible b) Initial velocity of the steam is 135m/s.

Knowledge B

2 Explain the various types of steam nozzles Knowledge E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 220

3

Dry saturated Steam at 5 bar with negligible velocity

expands isentropically in a convergent nozzle to 1bar

and dryness fraction 0.94. Determine the velocity of

steam leaving the nozzle.

Analysis B

4 Explain types of steam Nozzles comprehension A

5

Steam enters a group of nozzles of a steam turbine at

12bar 2200C and leaves at 1.2bar. The steam turbine

develops 220KW with specific steam consumptions of

13.5Kg/KWh. If the diameter of nozzles at throat is

7mm, calculate the number of nozzles

comprehension B

6 Discuss about the applications of Steam nozzles Knowledge B

7

Calculate the percentage increase in discharge from a

convergent-divergent nozzle expanding steam from

8.75 bar dry to 2 bar, when the expansion is taking

place under thermal equilibrium.

Knowledge B

8

In an impulse turbine (with a single row wheel) the

mean diameter of the blades is 1.05m and speed is

3000r.p.m. The nozzle angle is 180 , the ratio of the

blade speed to steam speed is 0.42 and the ratio of the

relative velocity at outlet from the blades to that at inlet

is 0.84. The outlet angle of the blade is to be made 30

less than the inlet angle. The steam flow is 10kg(S)s.

Draw the velocity diagram for the blades and derive the

following: (a) Tangential thrust on the blades and Axial

thrust

Analysis e

9 What is the operating principle of a reaction turbine? Analysis B

10 What is an extraction turbine Knowledge A

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1

Name the methods employed to increase the

specific output and thermal efficiency of the

plant?

Analysis B

2 Applications of the gas turbines? comprehension E

3 what do you mean by the term "gas

turbines"? comprehension B

4 Draw a neat sketch of open cycle gas turbine

? Analysis A

5 Name various fuels used in gas turbines? Knowledge B

6 Write a short note on the fuels used in gas

turbines? comprehension B

7 Explain inter cooling of open cycle gas Analysis E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 221

turbines?

8 Explain regeneration of open cycle gas

turbine? Knowledge B

9 Explain reheating of open cycle gas turbine ? Knowledge A

10 Write the merits of closed cycle? Knowledge B

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 What is the principle of a Gas Turbine? Give its

applications? Analysis B

2 Explain the effect of operating variables on Thermal

Efficiency? comprehension E

3 Explain the methods to improve the efficiency of a gas

turbine power plant? comprehension B

4 Explain the gas turbine cycle with reheating with neat

sketches? Analysis A

5 What is effectiveness or efficiency of a generator? Knowledge B

6 What are the fuels generally used in Gas turbines? comprehension E

7 Briefly explain Annular combustion chamber with a

neat sketch? Analysis B

8 What are the basic requirements of a Combustion

chamber? Knowledge A

9 Explain the gas turbine cycle with a regenerator? Knowledge B

10 Explain the effect of pressure ration on the thermal

efficiency of a Gas turbine? Knowledge E

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Short Answer Questions

1 write Principle of jet propulsion? Knowledge B

2 Explain the role or function of diffuser nozzle in

turbo jet gas turbine plant? Knowledge E

3 Define thrust power, propulsive power with their

formulas? Analysis B

4 Define propulsive efficiency ,thermal efficiency

with their formulas? comprehension B

5 Draw a neat sketch of turbo jet? comprehension E

6 Distinguish between jet propulsion and rocket

propulsion? Knowledge B

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 222

7 Requirements of an ideal rocket propellant? Knowledge A

8 Write the applications of rocket? Analysis B

9 Write the advantages of Ram-jet engine? Analysis B

10 Write the advantages of pulse -jet engine? Knowledge E

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Tutorials

Long Answer Questions

1 What are the important properties of a good

propellant? Knowledge B

2 Why liquid fuels are preferred in Rocket propulsion? Knowledge E

3 Describe the working principle of turbo propeller

engine with a neat sketch? Analysis B

4 With the help of a neat diagram, explain the principle

of solid propulsion rocket? comprehension A

5 Distinguish between Jet and rocket engines? comprehension B

6 Explain what is a Rocket Engine with a neat

diagram? Give its applications? Knowledge B

7 What is bleed burn type of thrust augmentation? Knowledge E

8 Describe Reheating method of thrust augmentation? Analysis B

9 Name the processes involved in turbo jet engine cycle

and draw its TS diagram? Analysis B

10 Write the differences between solid and liquid

propellant rocket? Knowledge E

14. 13 ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS:

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 What do you mean by mean temperature Evaluate E

2 What is work ratio Remember A

3 What is specific steam consumption Understand A

4 What is effectiveness Evaluate E

5 What is efficiency ratio Evaluate E

6 Draw the mechanical system to show different process

of rankin cycle Remember A

7 What does Rankine cycle comprises of? Understand A

8 In which operation of steam engines, the vapour cycle Analysis B

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 223

is adopted ?

9 How In rankine cycle the work output from the turbine

is given ? Understand B

10 What is the range of Rankine cycle efficiency of a good

steam power plant ? Analysis B

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-I

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

A steam power plant operates on the reheatRankine

cycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5

Mpa and 550°C at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2 MPa.

Steamis then reheated at constant pressure to450°C

before it expands in the low-pressureturbine. The

isentropic efficiencies of theturbine and the pump are 85

percent and 90percent, respectively. Steam leaves

thecondenser as a saturated liquid. If themoisture content

of the steam at the exit ofthe turbine is not to exceed

5percent, determine(a) the condenser pressure(b) the net

power output(c) the thermal efficiency Answers: (a) 9.73

kPa, (b) 10.2 MW, (c) 36.9 percent

Evaluate E

2

In a Rankin cycle, the steam at inlet to turbine is

saturated at a pressure of 35bar, and the exhaust

pressure is 0.2bar. Calculate i) The pump work ii)

Turbine work iii) Rankine efficiency.

Remember A

3 Derive An Expression for Rankine Cycle efficiency Understand A

4

A steam power plant operates on the reheatRankine

cycle. Steam enters the high-pressure turbine at 12.5

Mpa and 550°C at arate of 7.7 kg/s and leaves at 2 MPa.

Steamis then reheated at constant pressure to450°C

before it expands in the low-pressureturbine. The

isentropic efficiencies of theturbine and the pump are 85

percent and 90percent, respectively. Steam leaves

thecondenser as a saturated liquid. If themoisture content

of the steam at the exit ofthe turbine is not to exceed

5percent, determine(a) the condenser pressure(b) the net

power output(c) the thermal efficiency Answers: (a) 9.73

kPa, (b) 10.2 MW, (c) 36.9 percent

Evaluate E

5 Discuss Briefly about Orsat apparatus Analysis B

6 Discuss Briefly about Adiabatic Flame Temperature Understand B

7

Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal

reheat Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure

turbine at 15 MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the

Evaluate E

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 224

condenser at a pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture content

of the steam at the exit of the low-pressure turbineis not

to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the pressure at

which the steam should be reheated(b) the thermal

efficiency of the cycle.Assume the steam is reheated to

the inlet temperature of the high-pressure turbine.

8

During a boiler trial, the dry flue gas analysis by volume

was repeated as CO2=13%, CO=0.3%, O2=6%,

N2=80.7% . The coal analysis by mass was reported as

C=62.4%, H2 =4.2%, O2=4.5 %, Moisture=15%,

Ash=13.9%. Calculate: i) Minimum air required to burn

one Kg of coal. ii) Mass of air actually supplied per Kg

of coal

Remember A

9

Consider a steam power plant operating on the ideal

reheat Rankinecycle. Steam enters the high-pressure

turbine at 15 MPa and 600°Cand is condensed in the

condenser at a pressure of 10 kPa. If themoisture content

of the steam at the exit of the low-pressure turbineis not

to exceed 10.4 percent, determine(a) the pressure at

which the steam should be reheated(b) the thermal

efficiency of the cycle.Assume the steam is reheated to

the inlet temperature of the high-pressure turbine

Understand a

10

Consider a steam power plant that operates on an ideal

reheat–regenerative Rankinecycle with one open

feedwater heater, one closed feedwater heater, and one

reheater.Steam enters the turbine at 15 MPa and 600°C

and is condensed in the condenser at apressure of 10 kPa.

Some steam is extracted from the turbine at 4 MPa for

the closedfeedwater heater, and the remaining steam is

reheated at the same pressure to 600°C.The extracted

steam is completely condensed in the heater and is

pumped to 15 MPabefore it mixes with the feedwater at

the same pressure. Steam for the openfeedwater heater is

extracted from the low-pressure turbine at a pressure

of0.5 MPa.Determine, a) the fractions of steam extracted

from the turbine b) the thermal efficiency of the cycle

Evaluate e

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Define evaporation ratio. Understand a

2 State two causes for rise in exit flue gas temperature in a

boiler Analysis b

3 Write the formula for evaluation of boiler efficiency by Understand b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 225

direct method.

4 . List out any four loss components in a heat balance of a

boiler. Evaluate e

5

Find out the excess air percentage supplied for a boiler

if the theoretical CO2 is 20.67% and the actual CO2

measured in the flue gas is 14%.

Remember a

6 What is a boiler? Understand a

7 What are the types of boilers? Understand a

8 What is water tube boilers? Analysis b

9 What is fire tube boilers? Understand B

10 What is superheaters? Evaluate E

Sl.No.

Questions Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-II

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Explain about mountings Remember a

2 Explain about accessories Understand a

3 Write the applications of nozzles? Analysis b

4 What are the types of nozzles? Understand b

5 What are the functions of nozzles? Evaluate e

6 What is flow through nozzles? Remember a

7 Describe the thermodynamic analysis of nozzles Understand a

8

Calculate the efficiency of the AFBC boiler by indirect

method. Fuel Analysis (% by mass) Carbon : 53.9 %

Hydrogen : 3.1 % Nitrogen : 1.1 % Sulphur : 0.3 % Ash :

23.8 % Oxygen : 10.5 % Moisture : 7.3 % GCV : 5060

kCal / kg The boiler operating parameters are given

below. Steam pressure : 62.0 kg / cm2 Steam

temperature : 470 oC Actual air supplied : 8.91 kg/kg of

coal Mass of dry flue gas : 9.31 kg/kg of coal Flue gas

temperature : 160 oC CO2 % : 14.7 CO ppm : 325 GCV

of bottom ash : 800 kCal / kg GCV of fly ash : 452.5

kCal / kg Ratio of bottom ash to fly ash 15: 85 Loss due

to hydrogen in fuel = 3.54% Loss due to moisture in fuel

= 0.93% Loss due to moisture in air = 0.2% Surface heat

losses = 2%.

Analysis b

9

In a process plant a coal fired boiler of 78% efficiency is

proposed to be replace with paddy husk fired boiler of

68% efficiency. Calculate the cost savings for changing

over to paddy husk. Calorific value of coal = 4800

kcalAl / kg Cost of coal = Rs. 2500 / MT GCV of paddy

husk (Kcal/kg) = 3568 Cost of Paddy Husk = Rs. 1100 /

MT Quantity of steam requirement = 15 TPH Enthalpy

Understand b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 226

of steam = 770 kCal / kg Enthalpy of feed water = 120

kCal / kg Annual operating hours of boiler = 8000 hrs

10

Estimate the boiler efficiency by indirect method for the

following data. Type of fuel fired = Paddy husk Paddy

Husk composition: Moisture = 10.79% Mineral Matter =

16.73% Carbon = 33.95% Hydrogen = 5.01% Nitrogen =

0.91% Sulphur = 0.09% Oxygen = 32.52% GCV

(Kcal/kg) = 3568 Cost of Paddy Husk = Rs. 1100 / MT

Ambient DBT = 32 oC Boiler parameters on Paddy

Husk Flue gas temperature = 190 oC CO2 in flue gas =

12 % The losses other than exhaust loss = 28%

Analysis b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Draw the neat sketch of PV graph of a condenser? Analysis b

2 Define Condenser? Understand b

3 What are the functions of a condenser? Evaluate e

4 Write the Advantages of a Condenser in a Steam

power plant? Remember a

5 Give the classification of Condensers? Understand a

6 Write the Advantages & Disadvantages of Jet

Condensers? Analysis b

7 Write the Advantages & Disadvantages of Surface

Condensers? Understand b

8 Classify Jet condensers? Analysis b

9 Compare Jet & Surface Condenser? Understand b

10 What is Condenser Efficiency? Evaluate e

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-III

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 Classify Surface Condensers? Evaluate e

2 Define Vacuum Efficiency? Remember a

3 What is a Jet Condenser? Understand a

4 Define degree of Reaction?(Rd) Understand b

5 Give the conditions for maximum Efficiency of

Reaction Turbine? Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 227

6 What is Parson Reaction Turbine? Understand b

7 What are the types of Compounding? Evaluate e

8 Sketch the velocity diagram of Reaction Turbine? Remember a

9 Draw the neat sketch of TS graph of a condenser? Understand a

10 What are the principal methods of Steam Governing? Understand b

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 write the demerits of closed cycle? Remember a

2 Explain liquid fuels and solid fuels? Understand a

3

why are back work ratios relatively high in gas

turbine plants compared to those of steam power

plants?

Analysis b

4 Draw a neat T-S diagram of open cycle gas turbine? Understand b

5 Limitations of gas turbines? Evaluate e

6 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with inter

cooler? Evaluate e

7 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with re-heater? Remember a

8 Draw a neat sketch of a turbine plant with

regenerator? Understand a

9 Explain joule cycle or closed cycle gas turbine? Understand b

10 Explain semi-closed cycle? Analysis b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 228

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-IV

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1

For an ideal cycle of a gas turbine plant, the compressor

receives air at 1 bar and 300K. The pressure ratio is 10

and maximum temperature is 1000K.Calculate per kg of

air:

a.) Network output

b.) Amount of heat added

Thermal efficiency

Understand a

2

In a gas turbine plant compressor takes in air at 1 bar

and 300K and compressed to 4 bar. Heat is added in the

combustion chamber to raise the temperature to 833K.

The calorific value of the fuel oil is 42000Kj/KgK. The

air flow rate is 1.25kg/s. The isentropic efficiencies of

compressor and turbine are 85% and 83% resp. Assume

Index for compression as 1.4 and Cp=1.0Kj/kgK and

index for expansion is 1.32 and Cp=1.05Kj/KgK.

Calculate the overall efficiency of the plant

Analysis b

3

In a constant pressure open cycle gas turbine air enters

at 1 bar and 293K and leaves the compressor at 5 bar.

Using the following data:

Tempt. of gases entering the turbine = 953K

Pressure loss in combustion chamber = 0.1 bar

Compressor efficiency = 85%

Turbine efficiency = 80%

Combustion efficiency = 85% , Cp=1.024Kj/KgK for

air and gas Find the thermal efficiency of the cycle?

Understand b

4

Air enters compressor of gas turbine plant at 1 bar and

300K. The compressor pressure ratio is 10. The

temperature at the inlet to the first turbine stage is

1400K, and expanded to 3 bar. The air is then reheated

to 1400K and expanded in the second stage to a

pressure of 1 bar. Determine Thermal efficiency?

Understand a

5

The air supplied to a gas turbine plant is 10kg/s. The

pressure ratio is 6 and the pressure at the inlet of the

compressor is 1 bar. The compressor is two stage and is

provided with a perfect inter cooling. The inlet

temperature of air is 300K and the maximum

temperature is limited to 1073K. A regenerator with an

effectiveness of 0.7 is induced in the plant. Neglecting

the mass of fuel, determine the thermal efficiency of the

plant?

Analysis b

6 The intake conditions of a constant pressure gas turbine Understand b

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 229

are 1 bar and 288K. The maximum pressure and

temperature in the cycle are 5 bar and 853K. What must

be the isentropic efficiency of the turbine if the overall

plant efficiency is 18%? Assume isentropic efficiency

of compressor is 80%. Take Cp=1.004KJ/kg K for air,

Cp=1.096Kj/KgK for gases and R=0.287KJ?KgK for

air and gas.

7

In a gas turbine plant, the compressor takes in air at 1

bar and 288K and compresses it to 4 bar. The fuel air

ratio is 0.0125 and the calorific value is 41870KJ/Kg.

The isentropic efficiencies of compressor and turbine

are 85% and 82% resp. Turbine inlet temperature is

1000K. Find the overall thermal efficiency?

Remember a

8

Air enters a compressor to open cycle, constant pressure

gas turbine plant at a pressure of 1 bar and a

temperature of 300K. The pressure ratio is 5 and the

turbine inlet temperature is 823K. Assume compressor

and turbine efficiencies to be 85%, determine thermal

efficiency of the plant, when a regenerator with 60%

effectiveness is used?

Understand a

9

The air enters a compressor of brayton cycle at 1 bar

and 288K.The turbine inlet temperature and pressure

are 923K and 4 bar. Assuming turbine efficiency=85%

and compressor efficiency=80%. Determine the

efficiency of the cycle

Evaluate e

10 What is Actual Gas turbine Cycle? Explain with PV and

TS diagram

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Short Answer Questions

1 Draw a neat sketch of Ram-jet engine? Understand a

2 Draw a neat sketch of pulse-jet engine? Analysis b

3 Classify rockets according to the type of propellant? Understand b

4 Classify rockets according to the number of motors? Understand a

5 Explain velocity of approach of air? Analysis b

6 What is "Ram effect" ? Understand b

7 Write the limitations of Ram-jet engine? Evaluate e

8 Write the limitations of pulse-jet engine? Remember a

9 When is the best performance of ram-jet engine

obtained? Understand a

10 Explain the process inside the combustion chamber

of "ram-jet engine"? Evaluate e

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 230

Sl.No. Questions

Blooms

Taxonomy

Level

Course

Outcome

UNIT-V

Assignments

Long Answer Questions

1 What are the advantages and limitations of liquid

propellant rockets? Understand a

2 Differentiate Turbo prop and Turbo Jet engine? Analysis b

3 What is water-methanol injection method of thrust

augmentation? Understand b

4 Define propulsive efficiency and Thermal efficiency of

jets? Remember a

5 Describe the operation of pulse jet engine with a neat

sketch? Understand a

6 Differentiate between air breathing engines and rockets? Evaluate e

7

The effective jet velocity from a rocket is 2600m/s. The

forward flight velocity is 1300m/s and the propellant

consumption is 75 kg/s. Calculate a.) Thrust b.) Thrust

Power c.) Propulsive efficiency?

Understand a

8

A turbine aircraft flies with a velocity of 260m/s at an

altitude where the air is at 0.35 bar and 233k. The

compressor has a pressure ratio of 10 and temperature of

the gases at the turbine inlet is 1368K. Air enters the

compressor at a rate of 45.4kg/s. Determine

a.) The velocity of the gases at the nozzle exit

b.) The propulsive efficiency

Analysis b

9

A turbo jet aircraft is flying with a velocity of 320m/s at

an altitude where the air is 0.32 bar and tempt is 241K.

The pressure ratio across the compressor is 12, and the

tempt at the turbine inlet is 1400K. Assuming ideal

operations for all the components and constant specific

heat of air, determine: Velocity of the exhaust gases &

Propulsive efficiency

Understand b

10

Air enters the diffuser of a ram jet engine at 0.25 bar,

220K with a velocity of 855.5m/s and decelerates to

negligible velocity. The heat addition is 900Kj/kg of air.

Air exits the nozzle at 0.25 bar. Determine : the pressure

at the diffuser exit & the velocity at the nozzle exit

Understand a

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 231

15. MACHINE TOOLS & METROLOGY LAB

Section A :

1. Measurement of lengths, heights, diameters by vernier calipers micrometers etc.

2. Measurement of bores by internal micrometers and dial bore indicators.

3. Use of gear teeth, vernier calipers and checking the chordal addendum and chordal height of

spur gear.

4. Machine tool “alignment test on the lathe.

5. Machine tool alignment test on milling machine.

6. Tool makers microscope and its application

7. Angle and taper measurements by Bevel protractor, Sine bars, etc.

8. Use of spirit level in finding the flatness of surface plate.

9. Thread measurement by Two wire/ Three wire method or Tool makers microscope.

10. Surface roughness measurement by Taly Surf.

11. Surface Wear Resistances Test using Electro Spark Coating Device.

Section B :

1. Introduction of general purpose machines -Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine, Shaper,

2. Planing machine, slotting machine, Cylindrical Grinder, surface grinder and tool and cutter

grinder.

3. Step turning and taper turning on lathe machine

4. Thread cutting and knurling on -lathe machine.

5. Drilling and Tapping

6. Shaping and Planing

7. Slotting

8. Milling

9. Cylindrical Surface Grinding

10. Grinding of Tool angles.

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 232

Machne Tools Experiments:

1. INTRODUCTION OF GENERAL PURPOSE OF MACHINES - Lathe machine, - Shaper machine, - Slotting machine, - Planning machine, - Drilling machine, - Boring machine, - Milling machine, - Grinding machine - Lapping machine - Honing machine - Broaching machine

2. LATHE OPERATIONS - Facing - Chamfering - Step turning - Taper turning - Plain turning - Knurling - Grooving - Thread cutting

3. DRILLING OPERATIONS -Drilling -Boring -Tapping 4. SHAPING AND PLANNING OPERATIONS 5. SLOTTING OPERATIONS 6. MILLING OPERATIONS -Vertical milling 7. GRINDING OPERATIONS

- Surface grinding

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 233

16. METROLOGY LAB

1. VERNIER CALIPERS

2. MICROMETER(OUTSIDE)

3. MICROMETER(INSIDE)

4. GEAR TOOTH MICROMETER

5. BORE GUAGE

6. SPIRIT LEVEL

7. OPTICAL BEVEL PROTRACTOR

8. TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

9. SCREW THREAD MICROMETER

10. VERNIER HEIGHT GAUGE

11. MICROMETER DEPTH GAUGE

12. ALIGNMENT TEST ON DRILLING MACHINE

13. ALIGNMENT TEST ON MILLING MACHINE

14. ALIGNMENT TEST ON LATHEMACHINE

Dept. of MECH

MLR Institute of Technology,Dundigal,Hyderabad-500 043 Page 234

17. THERMAL ENGINEERING LAB

1. I.C. Engines Valve / Port Timing Diagrams

2. I.C. Engines Performance Test( 4 -Stroke Diesel Engines )

3. I.C. Engines Performance Test on 2-Stroke Petrol

4. Evaluation of Engine friction by conducting Morse test on 4-Stroke Multi cylinder Petrol Engine

5. Evaluate of engine friction by conducting motoring /retardation test on 4 stroke diesel Engine.

6. Heat balance on IC Engines.

7. Determination of A/F Ratio and Volumetric Efficiency on IC Engines.

8. Determine of Economical speed test for fixed load on 4-stroke Engine.

9. Determine optimum cooling water temperature on IC Engine

10. Dis-assembly / Assembly of Engines.

11. Performance test on Reciprocating Air-compressor unit.

12. Study of Boilers.